IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

252
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System V100R003 IDU 610/620 Hardware Description Issue 07 Date 2010-05-25 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Transcript of IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Page 1: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemV100R003

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

Issue 07

Date 2010-05-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 3: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 5: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

About This Document

PurposeThe OptiX RTN 600 system consists of the indoor unit (IDU) and outdoor unit (ODU). The IDUaccesses services, and performs the multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing on theservices. The ODU is an outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 600 system. It performs frequencyconversion and amplification for signals. This document describes the chassis, boards,accessories, and cables of the IDU 610 and IDU 620. This document helps readers to gaincomprehensive understanding of the hardware of the IDU 610 and the hardware of the IDU 620.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 600 V100R003

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R007C03

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer

l Installation and commissioning engineer

l Field maintenance engineer

l Data configuration engineer

l System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 600

Conventions

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

General ConventionsThe general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 7: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made to previous issues.

Updates in Issue 07 (2010-05-25)Seventh release.

The description of the IF1A/IF1B/IF0A/IF0B boards is updated due to change of the powerdistribution mode.

Updates in Issue 06 (2009-06-15)Sixth release.

The description of the switch operation guidance label is added.

Updates in Issue 05 (2009-04-25)Fifth release.

Description of a new type of E1 cable is added. .

Updates in Issue 04 (2009-02-25)Fourth release.

Updated the radio work modes of Hybrid microwave.

Updates in Issue 03 (2009-01-10)Third release.

Updated the interface description of the SL62PO1.

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-10-30)Second release.

Updated the specifications of the equipment.

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-09-20)Initial release.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 9: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction to the Product......................................................................................................1-11.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-21.2 Equipment Type..............................................................................................................................................1-4

2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-12.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-22.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis.....................................................................................................................2-32.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-5

3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-13.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-33.2 Board Configuration........................................................................................................................................3-33.3 IF1A/IF1B.......................................................................................................................................................3-6

3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-63.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-63.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................3-83.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-123.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-153.3.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-153.3.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-18

3.4 IFX................................................................................................................................................................3-193.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-193.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-193.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-213.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-243.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-263.4.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-273.4.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-28

3.5 IF0A/IF0B.....................................................................................................................................................3-303.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-303.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-303.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-31

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Contents

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-333.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-363.5.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-363.5.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-38

3.6 IFH2..............................................................................................................................................................3-393.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-393.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-393.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-413.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-443.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-483.6.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-493.6.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-52

3.7 SL4................................................................................................................................................................3-533.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-533.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-543.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-553.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-583.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-603.7.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-603.7.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-603.7.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-61

3.8 SL1/SD1........................................................................................................................................................3-623.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-623.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-623.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-643.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-663.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-683.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-693.8.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-693.8.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-70

3.9 SLE/SDE.......................................................................................................................................................3-713.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-713.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-713.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-733.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-753.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-773.9.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-783.9.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-78

3.10 PL3..............................................................................................................................................................3-793.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-793.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-793.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-80

ContentsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 11: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-823.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-833.10.6 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-843.10.7 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-84

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................................................................................................................3-853.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-853.11.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-853.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-863.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-883.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-933.11.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-943.11.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-943.11.8 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-95

3.12 EFT4............................................................................................................................................................3-963.12.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-963.12.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-963.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-973.12.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-993.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1013.12.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1023.12.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-104

3.13 EMS6.........................................................................................................................................................3-1053.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1053.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1053.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1083.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1103.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1143.13.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-1153.13.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1153.13.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-119

3.14 PXC...........................................................................................................................................................3-1213.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1213.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1213.14.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1223.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1243.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1263.14.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1273.14.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-127

3.15 SCC...........................................................................................................................................................3-1293.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1293.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1293.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-130

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Contents

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1323.15.5 Jumpers and Storage Card................................................................................................................3-1383.15.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1403.15.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-1413.15.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-142

3.16 Fan Tray Assembly...................................................................................................................................3-1443.16.1 Composition.....................................................................................................................................3-1443.16.2 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1443.16.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1443.16.4 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1453.16.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1453.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-146

4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-14.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-44.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-54.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-15.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-35.2 Protection Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................5-3

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable................................................................................................................5-45.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel..........................................................................................5-4

5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-55.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-65.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-75.6 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................................5-9

5.6.1 E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the external equipment...............................................................5-95.6.2 E1 cables to the E1 panel.....................................................................................................................5-135.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-15

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable.....................................................................5-175.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable..............................................................................................................................5-175.9 External Alarm Transit Cable.......................................................................................................................5-205.10 Serial Port Cable..........................................................................................................................................5-225.11 Orderwire Line............................................................................................................................................5-235.12 Network Cable.............................................................................................................................................5-23

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards...................................................A-1

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1B.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................B-2B.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................B-2B.3 F-J..................................................................................................................................................................B-7

ContentsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 13: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

B.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................B-10B.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................B-12B.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................B-16

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Contents

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 14: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 15: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figures

Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620........................................1-2Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620......................................1-3Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmission products.........1-4Figure 1-4 IDU 610..............................................................................................................................................1-5Figure 1-5 IDU 620..............................................................................................................................................1-5Figure 2-1 IDU 610 chassis structure...................................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis structure...................................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-3 IDU 610 chassis with wall-mounting holes........................................................................................2-3Figure 2-4 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes........................................................................................2-4Figure 2-5 IDU 610 chassis without wall-mounting holes...................................................................................2-4Figure 2-6 IDU 620 chassis without wall-mounting holes...................................................................................2-5Figure 2-7 Positions of the IDU 620 labels..........................................................................................................2-7Figure 3-1 Board appearance................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-2 Board bar code....................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration........................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle..........................................................................3-8Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel...............................................................................................................................3-12Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel................................................................................................................................3-13Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 610............................................................................................3-15Figure 3-8 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-15Figure 3-9 Block diagram of the IFX working principle...................................................................................3-21Figure 3-10 IFX front panel...............................................................................................................................3-24Figure 3-11 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-26Figure 3-12 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle......................................................................3-31Figure 3-13 IF0A front panel.............................................................................................................................3-34Figure 3-14 IF0B front panel..............................................................................................................................3-34Figure 3-15 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620..........................................................................................3-36Figure 3-16 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave..........................3-40Figure 3-17 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle...............................................................................3-41Figure 3-18 IFH2 front panel.............................................................................................................................3-44Figure 3-19 RJ-45 front view.............................................................................................................................3-46Figure 3-20 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620...................................................................................................3-48Figure 3-21 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle.................................................................................3-56

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Figures

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

Page 16: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-22 SL4 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-58Figure 3-23 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-60Figure 3-24 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle.........................................................................3-64Figure 3-25 SL1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-66Figure 3-26 SD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-66Figure 3-27 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 610.............................................................................................3-68Figure 3-28 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620.............................................................................................3-69Figure 3-29 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle........................................................................3-73Figure 3-30 SLE front panel...............................................................................................................................3-75Figure 3-31 SDE front panel..............................................................................................................................3-75Figure 3-32 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 610............................................................................................3-77Figure 3-33 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-77Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle.................................................................................3-80Figure 3-35 PL3 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-82Figure 3-36 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 610.....................................................................................................3-83Figure 3-37 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-83Figure 3-38 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle................................................................3-86Figure 3-39 PO1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-88Figure 3-40 PH1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-88Figure 3-41 PD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-89Figure 3-42 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)........................................................................3-90Figure 3-43 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).......................................................................3-91Figure 3-44 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)............................................................................3-92Figure 3-45 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 610.................................................................................... 3-94Figure 3-46 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620.................................................................................... 3-94Figure 3-47 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle...............................................................................3-98Figure 3-48 EFT4 front panel.............................................................................................................................3-99Figure 3-49 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-100Figure 3-50 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 610.................................................................................................3-101Figure 3-51 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-101Figure 3-52 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle............................................................................3-109Figure 3-53 EMS6 front panel..........................................................................................................................3-110Figure 3-54 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-113Figure 3-55 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620................................................................................................3-115Figure 3-56 Block diagram of the PXC............................................................................................................3-123Figure 3-57 Cross-connect unit architecture....................................................................................................3-124Figure 3-58 PXC front panel............................................................................................................................3-124Figure 3-59 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 610..................................................................................................3-126Figure 3-60 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620..................................................................................................3-126Figure 3-61 Block diagram of the SCC............................................................................................................3-130Figure 3-62 SCC front panel............................................................................................................................3-132Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-134

FiguresOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 17: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-64 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface........................................................................3-135Figure 3-65 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces......................................................3-136Figure 3-66 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface...............................................................................3-136Figure 3-67 Positions of the jumpers and storage card....................................................................................3-139Figure 3-68 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 610....................................................................................................3-140Figure 3-69 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620....................................................................................................3-141Figure 3-70 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame...............................................3-142Figure 3-71 Fan tray assembly composition....................................................................................................3-144Figure 3-72 Block diagram of the fan board....................................................................................................3-145Figure 3-73 FAN front panel............................................................................................................................3-146Figure 3-74 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620...............................................................................3-147Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3Figure 4-3 PDU front panel..................................................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle....................................................................................4-6Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode...............................................................................4-7Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode.................................................................................4-7Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable................................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable.....................................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel.....................................................................5-5Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper........................................................................................................................5-6Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)................................................................................5-10Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)............................................................................5-10Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable.......................................................................................................5-11Figure 5-12 Diagram of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel......................................5-14Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 transit cable................................................................................5-15Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable...................................5-17Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable........................................................................................5-18Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable....................................................................................5-20Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable......................................................................................................5-22Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire.......................................................................................................5-23Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable.........................................................................................................5-25

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Figures

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

Page 18: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 19: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Tables

Table 1-1 Differences between the IDU 610 and IDU 620..................................................................................1-4Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-5Table 3-1 List of IDU 620 boards........................................................................................................................3-4Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B......................................................3-9Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B...................................................3-11Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................3-13Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description........................................................................................................3-14Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B.........................................................................................3-15Table 3-7 Radio work modes..............................................................................................................................3-16Table 3-8 IF performance...................................................................................................................................3-18Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...................................................................3-18Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B...........................................................................3-19Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX..............................................................3-21Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX............................................................3-23Table 3-13 IFX indicator description.................................................................................................................3-24Table 3-14 IFX interface description..................................................................................................................3-25Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX..................................................................................................3-26Table 3-16 Radio work mode.............................................................................................................................3-27Table 3-17 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-29Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-29Table 3-19 XPIC performance...........................................................................................................................3-29Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX.......................................................................................3-30Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B..................................................3-32Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B.................................................3-33Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description......................................................................................................3-34Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description......................................................................................................3-35Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B.......................................................................................3-36Table 3-26 Radio work modes............................................................................................................................3-37Table 3-27 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-38Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-38Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B...........................................................................3-39Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2............................................................3-42Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2..........................................................3-43

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Tables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

Page 20: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description...............................................................................................................3-44Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description................................................................................................................3-46Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..............................................................3-46Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.........................................................3-47Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description........................................................................................3-47Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2................................................................................................3-48Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames...........................................................3-49Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-52Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-52Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..............................................................................3-53Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2.....................................................................................3-53Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4..............................................................3-56Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4............................................................3-58Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-59Table 3-46 SL4 interface description.................................................................................................................3-59Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4.........................................................................................................3-60Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-61Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4...............................................................3-62Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1.....................................................3-64Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1....................................................3-65Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description.........................................................................................................3-67Table 3-53 SL1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-67Table 3-54 SD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-68Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1..........................................................................................3-69Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1.................................................................................................3-69Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-70Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1.......................................................3-71Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE....................................................3-73Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE...................................................3-74Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description........................................................................................................3-76Table 3-62 SLE interface description.................................................................................................................3-76Table 3-63 SDE interface description................................................................................................................3-76Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE.........................................................................................3-77Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance..........................................................................................3-78Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE......................................................3-79Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3..............................................................3-80Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3............................................................3-81Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-82Table 3-70 PL3 interface description.................................................................................................................3-83Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3..................................................................................................3-84Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance............................................................................................................3-84Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3...............................................................3-85

TablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 21: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1...............................................................................3-85Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................3-87Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1...........................................3-87Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description................................................................................................3-89Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-89Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-90Table 3-80 PH1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-90Table 3-81 PD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-90Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1).........................................................................3-91Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).........................................................................3-91Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)................................................................. 3-92Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)..............................................................................3-92Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1.................................................................................3-94Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1.........................................................................................3-94Table 3-88 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-95Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1......................................................3-95Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.....................................................3-96Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4...........................................................3-98Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4......................................................... 3-99Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description.............................................................................................................3-100Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description.............................................................................................................3-100Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1–FE4 interfaces.........................................................................................3-101Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description.................................................................................................3-101Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4..............................................................................................3-102Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance.....................................................................................3-104Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4..........................................................3-105Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B...............................................3-105Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6......................................................3-109Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6....................................................3-110Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description..........................................................................................................3-111Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description..........................................................................................................3-112Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-113Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-113Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-114Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6...........................................................................................3-115Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6..................................................................................................3-115Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance................................................................................................3-119Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..........................................................................3-120Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-121Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6.......................................................3-121Table 3-114 PXC indicator description............................................................................................................3-125Table 3-115 PXC interface description............................................................................................................3-125

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Tables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

Page 22: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-116 Slot assigning principle of the PXC.............................................................................................3-127Table 3-117 Clock timing and synchronization performance..........................................................................3-128Table 3-118 Wayside service interface performance.......................................................................................3-128Table 3-119 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC..........................................................3-128Table 3-120 Difference between the functional versions.................................................................................3-129Table 3-121 SCC indicator description............................................................................................................3-132Table 3-122 SCC interface description............................................................................................................3-133Table 3-123 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-134Table 3-124 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface.......................................................................3-135Table 3-125 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description.........................................................................................3-135Table 3-126 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface.............................................................3-137Table 3-127 Setting the jumpers.......................................................................................................................3-139Table 3-128 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-142Table 3-129 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-143Table 3-130 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-143Table 3-131 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC..........................................................3-143Table 3-132 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA........................................................................3-144Table 3-133 FAN indicator description............................................................................................................3-146Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3Table 4-3 PDU interface description....................................................................................................................4-5Table 5-1 Power cable connections......................................................................................................................5-3Table 5-2 IDU protection ground cable connections............................................................................................5-4Table 5-3 Power cable connections......................................................................................................................5-5Table 5-4 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7Table 5-5 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable).................................................................................5-11Table 5-6 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)...............................................................................5-12Table 5-7 120-ohm E1 cable connections..........................................................................................................5-13Table 5-8 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................5-14Table 5-9 MDR68-DB44 E1 transit cable connections......................................................................................5-15Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)........................................................................................5-18Table 5-11 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2)........................................................................................5-19Table 5-12 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3)........................................................................................5-19Table 5-13 External alarm transit cable connections..........................................................................................5-21Table 5-14 Serial port cable connections...........................................................................................................5-23Table 5-15 Orderwire wire connections.............................................................................................................5-23Table 5-16 Pin assignments of the MDI.............................................................................................................5-24Table 5-17 Pin assignments of the MDI-X.........................................................................................................5-24Table 5-18 Cable connection of the straight through cable................................................................................5-25Table 5-19 Cable connection of the crossover cable..........................................................................................5-26Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................A-1Table A-2 IFX indicator description....................................................................................................................A-2

TablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 23: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description........................................................................................................A-4Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description..................................................................................................................A-5Table A-5 SL4 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-6Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description...........................................................................................................A-6Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description..........................................................................................................A-7Table A-8 PL3 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-8Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description..................................................................................................A-8Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description...............................................................................................................A-9Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description..............................................................................................................A-9Table A-12 PXC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-11Table A-13 SCC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-12Table A-14 FAN indicator description..............................................................................................................A-13Table A-15 Weight of Boards............................................................................................................................A-13

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description Tables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxi

Page 24: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 25: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

1 Introduction to the Product

About This Chapter

This chapter provides basic information on the IDU 610 and IDU 620 in terms of productapplication and equipment type.

1.1 Network ApplicationThe OptiX RTN 620 is a split microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It canprovide a seamless microwave transmission solution for the mobile communication network orother private networks.

1.2 Equipment TypeThe IDU 610 and IDU 620 support pluggable boards. The IDU 610 and IDU 620, however, aredifferent from each other in terms of service access capability, number of microwave links, andradio frequency (RF) configuration mode because they adopt different chassis.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 26: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

1.1 Network ApplicationThe OptiX RTN 620 is a split microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It canprovide a seamless microwave transmission solution for the mobile communication network orother private networks.

The OptiX RTN 620 provides several types of service interfaces and features flexibleconfiguration and easy installation. In addition, the OptiX RTN 620 can provide a TDMmicrowave and Hybrid microwave integrated solution according to the network requirements.

Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

OptiX RTN 620 BTS BSC

E1

E1

E1

STM-1/E1 E1Regional BackhaulNetwork

E1 E1

E1

E1

E1

E1

1 Introduction to the ProductOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 27: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

Regional BackhaulNetwork

OptiX RTN 620 BTSNodeB BSCRNC

FEE1

FEE1

E1

FE/GE

E1

GE

E1

E1

STM-1/E1

FE

The OptiX RTN 620 can be networked with other OptiX transmission products. Thus, it canprovide an optical transmission and radio transmission seamlessly integrated solution to transmitSDH, PDH, and Ethernet services.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

Page 28: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmissionproducts

SDH/PDH/Ethernet

SDH/PDH/Ethernet

STM-1 ring

STM-4 ring

OptiX opticaltransmission product OptiX RTN 620

1.2 Equipment TypeThe IDU 610 and IDU 620 support pluggable boards. The IDU 610 and IDU 620, however, aredifferent from each other in terms of service access capability, number of microwave links, andradio frequency (RF) configuration mode because they adopt different chassis.

Table 1-1 lists the differences between the IDU 610 and IDU 620. Figure 1-4 and Figure 1-5show the appearances of the IDU 610 and IDU 620 respectively.

Table 1-1 Differences between the IDU 610 and IDU 620

Item IDU 610 IDU 620

Chassis height 1U 2U

Pluggable board Supported

Microwave type SDH/PDH SDH/PDH, Hybrida

Microwave modulationscheme

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

1 Introduction to the ProductOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 29: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Item IDU 610 IDU 620

AM function Not supported Supported

Number of microwavedirections

1 1 to 4

RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protectionconfiguration

1+0 non-protectionconfiguration, 1+1 protectionconfiguration, N+1protection configuration, andXPIC configuration

Service type SDH, PDH, and Ethernet services

NOTE

a: The Hybrid microwave indicates the hybrid transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services.

b: "AM" stands for adaptive modulation. The AM function can automatically adjust the modulation schemeaccording to the channel quality. The QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, and 256QAM can beused as the modulation scheme. The AM is used only in the Hybrid microwave.

Figure 1-4 IDU 610

Figure 1-5 IDU 620

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 1 Introduction to the Product

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

Page 30: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 31: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

2 Chassis

About This Chapter

The IDU 610/620 can house pluggable boards. The IDU 610 and IDU 620 adopt differentchassises.

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 610 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 44 mm (width x depth xheight). The IDU 610 has a two-layer structure and supports air convection. The dimensions ofthe IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth x height). The IDU 620has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 610 chassis and the IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes.

2.3 Installation Holes of the ChassisThe IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.

2.4 IDU LabelsLabels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labelsand perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury anddamage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 2 Chassis

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 32: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 610 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 44 mm (width x depth xheight). The IDU 610 has a two-layer structure and supports air convection. The dimensions ofthe IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth x height). The IDU 620has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.

Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show the chassis structures of the IDU 610 and IDU 620 respectively.

Figure 2-1 IDU 610 chassis structure

Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis structure

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 610 chassis and the IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes.

The IDU 610 and IDU 620 can be installed as follows:

l In a 300 mm ETSI cabinet

l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 33: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l In an open cabinet

l On the wall

l On a table

2.3 Installation Holes of the ChassisThe IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.

l IDU chassis with wall-mounting holesThe installation holes on the IDU chassis are classified into three groups. When you installthis type of IDU chassis on the wall, you can use the rack-mounting ears for the 19-inchcabinet or the rack-mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet. The three groups of installationholes are used for the following three installation modes:– Installing the IDU chassis in a cabinet

– Installing the IDU chassis in an open rackWhen you install the IDU chassis in an open rack, you can use the holes for the openrack or the holes for the cabinet depending on the actual situation.

– Installing the IDU chassis on the wall

Figure 2-3 IDU 610 chassis with wall-mounting holes

Installation holesfor the open rack

Installation holesfor wall-mouting

Installation holesfor the cabinet

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 2 Chassis

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Page 34: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 2-4 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes

Installation holesfor the open rack

Installation holesfor wall-mouting

Installation holesfor the cabinet

l IDU chassis without wall-mounting holes

The installation holes on the IDU chassis are classified into two groups. When you installthis type of IDU chassis on the wall, you need to use special wall-mounting ears and fastenthe wall-mounting ears on the rack-mounting ears of IDU. The two groups of installationholes are used for the following two installation modes:– Installing the IDU chassis in a cabinet

– Installing the IDU chassis in an open rackWhen you install the IDU chassis in an open rack, you can use the holes for the openrack or the holes for the cabinet depending on the actual situation.

Figure 2-5 IDU 610 chassis without wall-mounting holes

Installation holesfor the open rack

Installation holesfor the cabinet

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 35: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 2-6 IDU 620 chassis without wall-mounting holes

Installation holesfor the open rack

Installation holesfor the cabinet

2.4 IDU LabelsLabels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protectionlabel, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operationwarning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labelsand perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury anddamage to the equipment.

Label DescriptionTable 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. The actual labelsmay be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Indication

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48- -60V ; 10A

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINA

电源额定值

OptiX RTN 620

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

N14036

Productnameplate label

The product name and certification

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 2 Chassis

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

Page 36: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Label Label Name Indication

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

Certificate ofqualificationlabel

The equipment is qualified.

FAN

IU7(IF)IU5(IF)

IU3(PXC)IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF)IU6(IF)

IU4(EXT)(TPS)IU2(SCC)

Board layoutlabel

The boards that can be installed ineach slot

ESD

ESD protectionlabel

The equipment is sensitive to staticelectricity.

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Laser safetyclass label

The power class of the laser source

Grounding label The grounding position

ATTENTION 警告

CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清洗

! Periodiccleaning label

The air filter should be cleanedperiodically.

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

Fan warninglabel

The fan blades should not betouched when the fan is rotating.

Hightemperaturewarning label

The board surface temperature mayexceed 70°C when the ambienttemperature is higher than 55°C. Inthis case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touchingthe board.

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

! Operationwarning label

The ODU-PWR switch must beturned off before the IF cable isremoved.

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 37: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Label Label Name Indication

PULL

Operationguidance label

The switch lever must be pulledoutwards slightly before setting theswitch to the "I" or "O" position.NOTE

There may be no operation guidancelabel on the equipment that weredelivered previously.

Label PositionFigure 2-7 shows the positions of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards by using the IDU620 as an example. The actual positions of the labels may be different depending on theconfigurations of the chassis and boards.

Figure 2-7 Positions of the IDU 620 labels

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48- -60V ; 10A

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINA

电源额定值

OptiX RTN 620

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

N14036

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

ATTENTION 警告

CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清洗

!

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

ESD

FAN

IU7(IF)IU5(IF)

IU3(PXC)IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF)IU6(IF)

IU4(EXT)(TPS)IU2(SCC)

PULL

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 2 Chassis

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

Page 38: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 39: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3 Boards

About This Chapter

The IDU 610 and IDU 620 support the following types of boards: IF board, SDH board, PDHboard, Ethernet board, integrated power cross-connect clock board, system control andcommunication board, and fan board.

The boards of each type are as follows:

l IF board: IF1A/IF1B, IFX, IF0A/IF0B, IFH2

l SDH board: SL4, SL1, SD1, SLE, SDE

l PDH board: PL3, PO1, PH1, PD1

l Ethernet board: EFT4, EMS6

l Integrated power cross-connect clock board: PXC

l System control and communication board: SCC

l Fan board: FAN

3.1 Board AppearanceThe IDU 610 and the IDU 620 share the same boards. The board dimensions are203.6 mm x201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height).

3.2 Board ConfigurationThe IDU 620 can realize different functions by configuring different types of boards.

3.3 IF1A/IF1BThe IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board.

3.4 IFXThe IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board.

3.5 IF0A/IF0BThe IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board.

3.6 IFH2The IFH2 is the hybrid intermediate frequency board.

3.7 SL4The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

Page 40: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.8 SL1/SD1The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.9 SLE/SDEThe SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-portelectrical STM-1 board.

3.10 PL3The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board.

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1tributary board.

3.12 EFT4The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board.

3.13 EMS6The EMS6 is a 4 Port RJ45 + 2 Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching ProcessingBoard.

3.14 PXCThe PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board.

3.15 SCCThe SCC is a system control and communication board.

3.16 Fan Tray AssemblyThe IDU 610 adopts air convection and thus has no fan tray assembly. The IDU 620 adoptswind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 41: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.1 Board AppearanceThe IDU 610 and the IDU 620 share the same boards. The board dimensions are203.6 mm x201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height).

Figure 3-1 Board appearance

On the front panel of the board, there are two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejectorlevers are used to insert and remove the boards. The captive screws are used to fasten the board.The bar code of the board is attached to one of the two ejector levers.In the case of the EMS6board, a label indicating the MAC address is affixed on one ejector lever of the board.

Figure 3-2 Board bar code

Bar code

Inner code

③④

Board versionBoard nameBoard feature code

0514721055000015-SL61SD101① ② ③ ④

NOTE

The board feature code of an optical interface board is used to indicate the type of the optical interface onthe board. The board feature code of an E1 interface board is used to indicate the impedance of the interfaceon the board. For a detailed description of the board feature code, refer to the description of each board inthe document.

3.2 Board ConfigurationThe IDU 620 can realize different functions by configuring different types of boards.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Page 42: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration

FAN

Slot 20

EXT/IF Slot7

EXT/IF Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT/IF Slot8

EXT/IF Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

NOTE

EXT refers to the extended slot for a service board. IF refers to the slot for an IF board.

Table 3-1 List of IDU 620 boards

BoardName

Full Name Valid Slot Description

PXC Integrated power cross-connect clock board

Slot 1/3 Accesses one input of –48 V/–60V DC powerProvides a full timeslot cross-connection for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to16x16 VC-4.Supports the input and output ofone external clock signal.

SCC System control andcommunication board

Slot 2 Integrates an EOW subboard,occupying the logical slot 21.Provides the NM interface,external alarm interface,synchronous/asynchronous datainterface, and orderwire phoneinterface.

IF1A SDH intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of the ODUthat is connected to the IF boardis 10 plus the slot number of theIF board.The IF1A and IF1B boardssupport the TU-based and STM-1based microwave framestructures for establishingmicrowave links between twosets of IDU 610 or IDU 620. TheIF0A and IF0B boards supportthe E1-based microwave framestructure for establishingmicrowave links with the IDU605 1A/1B/2B.

IF1B SDH intermediatefrequency board

IF0A PDH intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8

IF0B PDH intermediatefrequency board

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 43: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

BoardName

Full Name Valid Slot Description

IFX XPIC intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of the ODUthat is connected to the IF boardis 10 plus the slot number of theIF board.Provides the XPIC function.Provides the STM-1 basedmicrowave frame structure.Supports only the DC-C powerdistribution mode.

IFH2 Hybrid intermediatefrequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8 l Provides one IF interface. Thelogical slot number of theODU that is connected to theIF board is 10 plus the slotnumber of the IF board.

l Provides one FE/GE electricalinterface for accessingEthernet services.

l Supports the AM function.

SL4 SDH single-port STM-4board

Slot 6/8 Uses the SFP optical module toprovide one STM-4 opticalinterface.

SL1 SDH single-port STM-1board

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Uses the SFP optical module toprovide one STM-1 opticalinterface.

SD1 SDH dual-port STM-1board

Uses the SFP optical module toprovide two STM-1 opticalinterfaces.

SLE SDH single-port STM-1electrical board

Provides one 75-ohm STM-1electrical interface.

SDE SDH dual-port STM-1electrical board

Provides two 75-ohm STM-1electrical interfaces.

PL3 3xE3/T3 tributary board Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides three 75-ohm E3/T3electrical interfaces.

PO1 8xE1 tributary board Provides eight 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

PH1 16xE1 tributary board Provides 16 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

PD1 32xE1 tributary board Provides 32 75/120-ohm E1interfaces.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

Page 44: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

BoardName

Full Name Valid Slot Description

EFT4 4-port 10M/100MEthernet transparenttransmission processingboard

Slot 4/5/6/7/8 Provides a 4x10/100BASE-T(X)interface for processing Ethernettransparent transmissionservices. The maximum uplinkbandwidth of the board is2xVC-4.

EMS6 4-port RJ45 + 2-portSFP Fast Ethernet /Gigabit EthernetSwitching ProcessingBoard

Provides four FE electricalinterfaces. The other two portsuse SFP optical/electricalmodules for providing two GEoptical/electrical interfaces. TheGE electrical interface iscompatible with the FE electricalinterface.Supports the transparentlytransmitted Ethernet transparenttransmission services and Layer 2switching services. Themaximum uplink bandwidth ofthe board is 2xVC-4.

FAN Fan board Slot 20 Provides wind cooling for theIDU 620.

3.3 IF1A/IF1BThe IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel tothe ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requries. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-Ipower distribution mode.

IF Processingl Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and –48 V power supplies.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 45: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processingl Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the TU pointer in PDH microwave signals.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

l Supports N+1 protection.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin an SNCP group.

l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE

l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

l The OptiX IDU 610 does not support the processing functions related to 1+1 protection and N+1protection.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

Page 46: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Supports inloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the IF1A/IF1B.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle

Backplane

PXCIF IF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwaveservice signal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Paired boards

Channel switchingsignal

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 47: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theautomatic gain control (AGC) circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

Page 48: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2Moverhead signal and sends it to the logic processingunit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 49: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Detects the PDH microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Detects the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes,DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signaland sends it to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts the TU pointer.

l Maps the TU-12s into the specified position in theVC-4.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-11

Page 50: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.3.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel

IF1A

IF1A

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 51: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel

IF1B

IF1B

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-13

Page 52: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description

Interface Description Type of connector Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 53: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.3.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 610, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slot 4. In the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can beinstalled in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A/IF1B

Figure 3-8 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A/IF1B IF1A/IF1B

IF1A/IF1B IF1A/IF1B

Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 610

Slot 4

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

NOTEIn the 1+1 configuration, the configuration data determines which IF board is the active board and whichis the standby board.

3.3.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The waysideservice attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply toboth PDH and SDH microwaves.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-15

Page 54: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Radio Work Mode

The IF board can operate in the following seven radio work modes.

Table 3-7 Radio work modes

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1 QPSK 7

4xE1 16QAM 3.5

8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

8xE1 16QAM 7

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)

22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)

26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)

35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)

44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)

53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

E3 QPSK 28 (27.5)

E3 16QAM 14 (13.75)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiXRTN 600. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

Radio Link ID

The radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

Wayside Service Attributes

When the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported by radio.The following are the two parameters of wayside services:

l 2M wayside Enable Status

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 55: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

This parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default,the 2M wayside service is disabled.

l 2M wayside input board

This parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC Attributes

ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end. The following are theparameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable status

This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

l ATPC upper threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustment

This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold setting

This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-17

Page 56: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.3.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processingperformance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF Performance

Table 3-8 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding forSDH signals

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 57: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B

Item Description

IF1A IF1B

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 420 g 400 g

Power consumption < 12.2 W

3.4 IFXThe IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board.

3.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFX is SL61.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODUand the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarizationinterference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode.

IF Processingl Maps VC-4 service signals into SDH microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes SDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates SDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and –48 V power supplies.

l Cancels the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal in the XPIC mode.

NOTE

When the XPIC function and the co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) function are used, the transmissioncapacity doubles under the same channel conditions.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads.

l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-19

Page 58: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

l Supports N+1 protection.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin an SNCP group.

l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 59: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of theIFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/IF1B.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-9 Block diagram of the IFX working principle

PXC

IF IFprocessing

unit

Logicproces

singunit SCC

SCC

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

PowerunitClock unit Power

unit

SCC

1+1HSB/FD/SDPaired boards

Backplane

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwaveservice signal ODU control signal

Channel switchingsignal

XPIC signal

XPIC Pairedboards

SMODEMunit

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-21

Page 60: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theAGC circuit.

l Filters the signal and splits the signal into two channels.– Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and

transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.– Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.

l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from thepaired IFX and transmits the converted signal to theMODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IFsignal from the paired IFX as a reference signal.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2Moverhead signal and sends it to the logic processingunit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 61: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC board.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC board.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-23

Page 62: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.4.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on thefront panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-10 IFX front panel

IFX

IFX

ODU-PWR

IF

LIN

K

AC

T

OD

UR

MT

STA

TSR

VXP

IC

XPIC

OUTIN

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-13 IFX indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 63: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function isdisabled.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-14 IFX interface description

Interface Description Type ofconnector

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

XPIC IN XPIC input signal SMA XPIC cable

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-25

Page 64: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interface Description Type ofconnector

Cable

OUT XPIC output signal

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.4.5 Valid SlotsThe IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-11 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IFX IFX

IFX IFX

Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 65: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.4.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1byte.

Radio Work ModeThe IFX supports only one radio work mode.

Table 3-16 Radio work mode

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l 27.5 MHz is the channel spacing of the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment.The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.

Radio Link IDThe radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

Wayside Service AttributesWhen the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported on radio.The following are the two parameters of wayside services:

l 2M wayside Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default,the 2M wayside service is disabled.

l 2M wayside input boardThis parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable statusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-27

Page 66: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l ATPC upper threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower threshold

When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustment

This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold setting

This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

XPIC Attributes

The XPIC enabled parameter can be set to enabled or disabled.

l When the XPIC function is enabled, the IFX splits the received IF signal, outputs one signalto the XPIC OUT port, and performs XPIC by using the reference IF signal from the XPICIN port.

l When the XPIC function is disabled, the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port must be loopedback by using an XPIC cable.

J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.4.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 67: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

IF Performance

Table 3-17 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

XPIC Performance

Table 3-19 XPIC performance

Item Description

Cross polarizationimprovement factor (XPIF)

19 dB

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-29

Page 68: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 450 g

Power consumption < 14.5 W

3.5 IF0A/IF0BThe IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board.

3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF0A/IF0B is SL61.

3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF0A/IF0B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel tothe ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF0A/IF0B board supports the DC-Ipower distribution mode.

IF Processingl Multiplexes 2xE1/5xE1/10xE1/16xE1 service signals into PDH microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes PDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates PDH microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and –48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

NOTE

l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 69: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and

setting the alarm threshold.l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance

threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards.l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-12 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principleBackplane

PXCIF IF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwaveservice signal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Paired boards

Channel switchingsignal

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-31

Page 70: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theAGC circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital modulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the PDH microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Detects the Link ID and generates the correspondingalarms.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and themicrowave RDI, and reports them to the SCC throughthe control bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytesfrom the PDH microwave frame to form a 2M overheadsignal and sends it to the logic processing unit.

l Maps the E1 signal in the PDH microwave frame intothe specified position in the VC-4.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC board.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 71: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC board.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.5.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-33

Page 72: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-13 IF0A front panel

IF0A

IF0A

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Figure 3-14 IF0B front panel

IF0B

IF0B

ODU-PWR

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 73: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description

Interface Description Type of connector Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-35

Page 74: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-15 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B

IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B

Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.5.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes.

Radio Work Mode

The IF0A/IF0B can operate in the following four radio work modes.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 75: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-26 Radio work modes

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

2xE1 QPSK 3.5

5xE1 QPSK 7

10xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are the channel spacings of the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment.The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.

l The 2xE1 work mode does not support 1+1 protection.

Radio Link IDThe radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable statusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

l ATPC upper thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustmentThis parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold settingThis parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-37

Page 76: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

3.5.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF Performance

Table 3-27 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 77: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 520 g

Power consumption < 13.7 W

3.6 IFH2The IFH2 is the hybrid intermediate frequency board.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFH2 is SL61.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to theODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmissionof E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distributionmode.

IF Processingl Supports the Hybrid microwave frame and supports the pure transmission of the E1 or

Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of the E1 and Ethernet signals.l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM).

l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.

l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.

l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and –48 V power supplies.

Ethernet Service ProcessingThe front panel of the IFH2 has a GE electrical interface. The GE electrical interface supportsthe following port functions:

l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The workingmodes supported are 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length of 1966bytes.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-39

Page 78: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

The GE electrical interface also supports the following Ethernet QoS functions:

l Supports the flow classification function that complies with IEEE 802.1p.

l Schedules the queues of four priority levels in the strict-priority (SP) mode.

Overhead Processingl Processes the overheads of the microwave signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.

l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

NOTE

When the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured in the Hybrid microwave, the two IFH2 boards mustwork with one EMS6 board. As shown in Figure 3-16, the GE ports of the main and standby IFH2 boardsare connected to two Ethernet ports of the EMS6 boards through network cables. The two Ethernet portsof the EMS6 board must be configured as a Link Aggregation Group.

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemFeature Description.

Figure 3-16 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave

FAN

Slot 20

IFH2

IFH2

IDU 620

EMS6

Slot 6

Slot 4

Slot 2

Slot 8

PXC

PXC

Slot 5

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 7

To the externalequipment

SCC

Network cable

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 79: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

l Supports the PRBS bit error test at the IF port.

l Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services arenot affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board isinitialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services canbe interrupted.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example todescribe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDHmicrowave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-17 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle

Backplane

PXC

IFIF

processingunit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service bus

Overhead bus Control bus

Microwave servicesignal

MUX/DEMUX

unit

MODEMunit

Combinerinterface

unit

Powerunit

SMODEMunit

Clockunit

Logiccontrol unit

SCC

ODU control signal

Pairedboard

Channel switching signal

Ethernet servicesignal

GE

Ethernetprocessing

unit

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-41

Page 80: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwaveservice signal from the IF signal.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port ofthe SCC CPU.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through theAGC circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates thecorresponding alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the hybrid microwave frame header andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Verifies the check code in the hybrid microwave frameand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the Link ID in the hybrid microwave frame andgenerates the corresponding alarms and performanceevents.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message in the hybridmicrowave frame and the changes in the microwaveRDI, and reports the changes to the SCC through thecontrol bus.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM byte, andDCC bytes from the hybrid microwave frame to forma 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps the E1 signal in the hybrid microwave frame intothe specified position in the VC-4 and sends the VC-4signal to the logic processing unit.

l Sends the Ethernet service signal in the hybridmicrowave frame to the Ethernet processing unit.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 81: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Ethernet processingunit

Classifies Ethernet service packets into four queues thathave different priorities according to IEEE 802.1p.Schedules the services in strict-priority (SP) mode andsends the services through the Ethernet interface.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

Ethernet processingunit

l Performs Ethernet performance counting for theaccessed FE/GE signal.

l Classifies the packets into four queues that havedifferent priorities according to IEEE 802.1p andschedules the services in SP mode.

l Sends the Ethernet signals to the MUX/DEMUX unit.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets hybrid microwave frame overheads.

l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, andmicrowave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-43

Page 82: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmittedfrom the SCC.

6 Combiner interfaceunit

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave servicesignal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to theIF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.6.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-18 IFH2 front panel

IFH

2

IFH

2

OD

U

AC

T

BER

RM

T

STA

TSR

VLI

NKIF

ODU-PWR

GE

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working normally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 83: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no power access.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.

Off The services are not configured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working normally.

On (red) The ODU has critical or major alarms, or hasno power access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received power of the ODU islower than the power to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errors exceed thethreshold.

Off The microwave bit errors are in the normalrange.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports an RDI.

Off The remote system does not report an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the active state (1+1protection).The board is activated (no protection).

Off The board is in the standby state (1+1protection).The board is not activated (no protection).

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-45

Page 84: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interfaces

Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description

Interface Description Type ofconnector

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF Jumper

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

GE GE electrical port RJ-45 Network cable

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

The GE port of the IFH2 supports the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing mode. For the front viewand pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-19 and refer to Table 3-34 and Table3-35.

Figure 3-19 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(–)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(–)

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 85: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(–)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(–)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(–)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(–)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(–)

The GE port has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-36.

Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-47

Page 86: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.6.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-20 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IFH2 IFH2

IFH2 IFH2

Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 5 > Slot 7 > Slot 8 > Slot 6

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 87: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.6.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radiowork mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters.

Radio Work Mode

Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames

Channel Spacing(MHz)a, b

ModulationScheme

Service Capacity(Mbit/s)

Maximum Numberof E1s in servicec

7 QPSK 10 5

7 16QAM 20 10

7 32QAM 25 12

7 64QAM 32 15

7 128QAM 38 18

7 256QAM 44 21

14 (13.75) QPSK 20 10

14 (13.75) 16QAM 42 20

14 (13.75) 32QAM 51 24

14 (13.75) 64QAM 66 31

14 (13.75) 128QAM 78 37

14 (13.75) 256QAM 90 43

28 (27.5) QPSK 42 20

28 (27.5) 16QAM 84 40

28 (27.5) 32QAM 105 50

28 (27.5) 64QAM 133 64

28 (27.5) 128QAM 158 75

28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 75

56 QPSK 84 40

56 16QAM 168 75

56 32QAM 208 75

56 64QAM 265 75

56 128QAM 313 75

56 256QAM 363 75

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-49

Page 88: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Channel Spacing(MHz)a, b

ModulationScheme

Service Capacity(Mbit/s)

Maximum Numberof E1s in servicec

40d 64QAM - 75

NOTE

l a: The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l b: The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiXRTN 600. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

l c: The E1 services consume the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. After the E1 servicecapacity is deducted from the service capacity, the remaining bandwidth of the service capacity can beused for the Ethernet services.

l d: This modes are the super PDH modes that do not support the transmission of Ethernet services.

Radio Link IDThe radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuouslysends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constantconnection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarmis reported on the corresponding IF port.

ATPC AttributesATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter accordingto the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:

l ATPC enable statusThis parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control thetransmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

l ATPC upper thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwaveframe. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC lower thresholdWhen the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies thetransmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in themicrowave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

l ATPC adjustmentThis parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment.

l Automatic ATPC threshold settingThis parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled,the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. Theequipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme.When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lowerthreshold are used.

NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 89: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

AM AttributesThe AM is a technology used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme based on the qualityof channels. The AM attributes include the following parameters:

l AM Enable StatusThis parameter determines whether the board enables the AM function to perform adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to Enable or Disable.

l IF Channel BandwidthThis parameter determines the channel spacing used in the case of adaptive modulation.This parameter can be set to 7 MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz.

l Modulation mode of the assurred AM capacityThis parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or256QAM.

l Modulation mode of the full AM capacityThis parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptivemodulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or256QAM.

l E1 capacityThis parameter specifies the number of E1s in the hybrid working mode. The number ofE1s must not exceed the maximum number of E1s when the committed-capacitymodulation scheme is used.

Ethernet ParametersThe parameters that you may frequently set for the GE port of the IFH2 are as follows:

l Basic attributes

l Flow control

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following threeparameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.

l Port enabledThis parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working modeThere are five working modes: 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex andauto-negotiation. Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending onthe working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, referto the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-51

Page 90: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.

– Enable symmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

– Disabled

The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.

– Enable symmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

3.6.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF Performance

Table 3-39 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 91: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Item Description

Adaptivetimedomainequalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) Interface Performance

The 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ-45

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 580 g

Power consumption < 16.4 W

3.7 SL4The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL4 is SL61.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-53

Page 92: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals.

Optical Interface Specificationsl The SL4 provides S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 optical interfaces.

l The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specificationsl Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors.

l Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser.

l Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules.

l Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power andreceive optical power.

l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

NOTEThe ALS functions as follows:

1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down.

2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval.

3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits lightcontinuously.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-4 signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-4 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-4 signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 93: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin a linear MSP group.

l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of the switching conditions for a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTE

For the details of SNCP, two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring, and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-55

Page 94: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-21 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCSTM-4

STM-4

O/Econversion

unit

Overheadprocessing

unit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service busOverhead bus Control bus

STM-4 signal

Paired board

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-4 optical signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Converts the STM-4 optical signals into electricalsignals.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 95: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

3 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

NOTE

If a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is configured, the overhead processing unit sends the overhead byteto the paired SL4 to realize the overhead pass-through function.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-57

Page 96: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.7.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-22 SL4 front panel

SL4 CLASS 1

LASERPRODUCTST

ATS

RV

LOS

TX RX

SL4

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 97: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicators

Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS On (red) The optical interface of theSL4 reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The optical interface of theSL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

Interfaces

Table 3-46 SL4 interface description

Interface Description Type ofConnector

Cable

TX Transmit port of the STM-4 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX Receive port of the STM-4 opticalinterface

LabelsThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than10 dBm (10 mW).

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-59

Page 98: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.7.5 Valid SlotsThe SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620.

Figure 3-23 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SL4

SL4

3.7.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board featurecode that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the barcode.

Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4

Board Feature Code Type of the OpticalModule

Part Number of theOptical Module

01 S-4.1 34060277

02 L-4.1 34060280

03 L-4.2 34060284

3.7.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 ByteThe board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 99: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.7.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-4 Optical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 622080

Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2

Fiber type Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance (km) 15 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm) –15 to –8 –3 to 2 -3 to 2

Minimum receiver sensitivity(dBm)

–28 –28 –28

Minimum overload (dBm) –8 –8 –8

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different typesof SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-61

Page 100: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 290 g

Power consumption < 7.2 W

3.8 SL1/SD1The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits2xSTM-1 optical signals.

Optical Interface Specificationsl The SL1/SD1 provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.

l The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specificationsl Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors.

l Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser.

l Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules.

l Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power andreceive optical power.

l Supports the ALS function.

NOTEThe ALS functions as follows:

1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down.

2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval.

3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits lightcontinuously.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 101: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer ProcessingProcesses AU pointers.

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in a linear MSP group.l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTEFor the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-63

Page 102: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SL1/SD1.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-24 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCSTM-1

STM-1

O/Econversion

unit

Overheadprocessing

unit

Logicprocessing

unit SCC

SCC

Service busOverhead bus Control bus

STM-1 signal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electricalsignals.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 103: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

3 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes clock.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-65

Page 104: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.8.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-25 SL1 front panel

SL1 CLASS 1

LASERPRODUCTST

ATSR

VLO

S1

TX1 RX1

SL1

Figure 3-26 SD1 front panel

SD

1

SD

1 CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STAT

LOS2

SRV

LOS1

TX2 RX2TX1 RX1

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 105: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicators

Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

Interfaces

Table 3-53 SL1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

TX1 Transmit port of anSTM-1 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-67

Page 106: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

RX1 Receive port of anSTM-1 opticalinterface

Table 3-54 SD1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

TX1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

RX1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1 opticalinterface

TX2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

LC (SFP)

RX2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1optical interface

LabelsThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than10 dBm (10 mW).

3.8.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 610, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 3 and 4. In the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 canbe installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-27 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 107: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-28 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1

SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1

SL1/SD1

Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 610

Slot 3 > slot 4

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.8.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board featurecode that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the barcode.

Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1

Board Feature Code Type of the OpticalModule

Part Number of theOptical Module

01 Ie-1 34060287

02 S-1.1 34060276

03 L-1.1 34060281

04 L-1.2 34060282

3.8.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 Byte

The board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-69

Page 108: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 Byte

The board supports four modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.8.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The followingtable provides the primary performance.

Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power(dBm)

–19 to –14 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

–30 –28 –34 –34

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 109: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Item Performance

Minimum overload (dBm) –14 –8 –10 –10

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different typesof SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1

Item Description

SL1 SD1

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 290 g 300 g

Power consumption < 3 W < 3.9 W

3.9 SLE/SDEThe SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-portelectrical STM-1 board.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits2xSTM-1 electrical signals.

Overhead Processingl Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals.

l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-71

Page 110: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTEHigher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode.The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified.The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receivedirection, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing

Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processingl Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels

in an SNCP group.

l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channelsin a linear MSP group.

l Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions.

l Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTEFor the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the alarm threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

NOTEFor the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the electrical interface.

l Supports outloop on the VC-4 path.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 111: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the SLE/SDE.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-29 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

PXCLine

interfaceunit

Overheadprocessing

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1 signalOverhead bus

SCC

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external STM-1 electrical signals are coupled bythe transformer and then are sent to the board.

2 CODEC unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.

l Performs CMI decoding.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-73

Page 112: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

3 Overhead processingunit

l Restores the clock signal.

l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS andR_LOF alarms.

l Performs descrambling.

l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byteand generates the corresponding alarms andperformance events.

l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte andreports it to the SCC.

l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and Kbytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to thelogic processing unit.

l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates thecorresponding performance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generates thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4signal into the logic processing unit.

4 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8Moverhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overheadof an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the8M signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes clock.

l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8Moverhead signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 113: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets the AU pointer.

l Sets multiplex section overheads.

l Sets regenerator section overheads.

l Performs scrambling.

3 Codec unit l Performs CMI coding.

4 Line interface unit l The STM-1 electrical signals are coupled by thetransformer and then are sent to the external cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-30 SLE front panel

SLE

SLE

STAT

SRV

R1 T1

Figure 3-31 SDE front panel

SD

E

SD

EST

ATSR

V

R1 T1 R2 T2

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-75

Page 114: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicators

Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Interfaces

Table 3-62 SLE interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

T Transmit port of anSTM-1 electricalinterface

SMB STM-1e cable

R Receive port of anSTM-1 electricalinterface

Table 3-63 SDE interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

T1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1electrical interface

SMB STM-1e cable

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 115: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

R1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1electrical interface

T2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1electrical interface

SMB

R2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1electrical interface

3.9.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 610, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 3 and 4. In the IDU 620, the SLE/SDEcan be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-32 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SLE/SDE SLE/SDE

Figure 3-33 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

SLE/SDE SLE/SDE

SLE/SDE SLE/SDE

SLE/SDE

Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE

Item Description

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 610

Slot 3 > slot 4

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 620

Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-77

Page 116: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.9.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 ByteThe board supports three modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.9.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interfaceperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-1 Electrical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. Thefollowing table provides the primary performance.

Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Code pattern CMI

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 117: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE

Item Description

SLE SDE

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 300 g 330 g

Power consumption < 4.2 W < 4.9 W

3.10 PL3The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PL3 is SL61.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals.

Service Signal Processingl Supports the setting and querying of the type of the accessed service signal by the software

(E3 or T3).

l Supports the setting and querying of the input/output equalization of the T3 service signal.

Overhead and Pointer Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1 and C2 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1 and C2 bytes.

Clock Function

Supports the first and third E3/T3 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the E3/T3 tributary.

l Supports the PRBS 15 test.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-79

Page 118: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PL3.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle

PXC

E1/T3

E1/T3

Lineinterface

unit

Mapping/Demapping

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

Backplane

Logiccontrol

unit

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external E3/T3 signal is coupled by thetransformer and then is sent to the board.

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signal.

l Restores the clock signal.

l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.

l Performs HDB3 decoding (in the case of E3 signals)or B3ZS decoding (in the case of T3 signals).

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 119: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

3 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3.

l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to beVC-3.

l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3.

l One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3.

l Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving andare multiplexed into one C-4.

l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and theVC-4 is formed.

4 Logic processingunit

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3.

l Processes the TU pointer and demultiplexes one VC-3from one TU-3.

l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Extracts E3/T3 signals.

3 Codec unit l Performs HDB3 coding (in the case of E3 signals) orB3ZS coding (in the case of T3 signals).

4 Line interface unit l The E3/T3 signal is coupled by the transformer andthen is sent to the external cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-81

Page 120: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-35 PL3 front panel

PL3

PL3

STAT

SR

V

R1 T1 R2 T2 R3 T3

Indicators

Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-82 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 121: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interfaces

Table 3-70 PL3 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

T1 Transmit port of thefirst E3/T3 electricalinterface

SMB E3/T3 cable

R1 Receive port of thefirst E3/T3 electricalinterface

T2 Transmit port of thesecond E3/T3electrical interface

SMB

R2 Receive port of thesecond E3/T3electrical interface

T3 Transmit port of thethird E3/T3 electricalinterface

SMB

R3 Receive port of thethird E3/T3 electricalinterface

3.10.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 610, the PL3 can be installed in slots 3 and 4. In the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installedin slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-36 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PL3 PL3

Figure 3-37 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PL3 PL3

PL3 PL3

PL3

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-83

Page 122: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3

Item description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 610

Slot 3 > slot 4

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.10.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte.

J1 ByteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

l 16-byte mode without CRC

l 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.10.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

E3/T3 Interface PerformanceThe performance of the E3/T3 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance

Item Performance

E3 T3

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 34368 44736

Code pattern HDB3 B3ZS

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-84 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 123: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Item Performance

E3 T3

Impedance (ohm) 75

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight)

Weight 310 g

Power consumption < 5.1 W

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1tributary board.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of thePH1/PD1 is SL61.

Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1

Item SL61PO1 SL62PO1

Connector type of E1interface

DB44 RJ45

E1 interface impedance 75 ohm or 120 ohm 120 ohm

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.ThePD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Overhead and Pointer Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.

l Supports the querying of the J2 and V5 bytes.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-85

Page 124: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 byte.

Clock Functionsl Supports the retiming function of E1 signals.

l Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop and outloop at the E1 tributary.

l Supports the PRBS 15 test.

l Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the servicesare not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also theboard is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed,services can be interrupted.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the PO1/PH1/PD1.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-38 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle

Logiccontrol

unit

PXC

E1

E1

Lineinterface

unit

Mapping/Demapping

unit

SCC

Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Codecunit

Logicprocessing

unit

Backplane

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-86 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 125: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Line interface unit l The external E1 signal is coupled by the transformerand then is sent to the board.

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signal.

l Restores the clock signal.

l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.

l Performs HDB3 decoding.

3 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-12.

l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to beVC-12.

l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-12.

l Three TU-12s are performed with byte interleavingand are multiplexed into one TUG-2.

l Seven TUG-2s are performed with byte interleavingand are multiplexed into one TUG-3.

l Three TUG-3s are performed with byte interleavingand are multiplexed into one C-4.

l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and theVC-4 is formed.

4 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indicationsignal to the PXC.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Procedure

Functionalmodule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

l Processes the clock signal.

l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-87

Page 126: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Procedure

Functionalmodule

Processing Flow

2 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.

l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.

l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects thecorresponding alarms and performance events.

l Extracts E1 signals.

3 Codec unit l Performs HDB3 coding.

4 Line interface unit l The E1 signal is coupled by the transformer and thenis sent to the external cable.

Control Signal ProcessingThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC.

3.11.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-39 PO1 front panelP

O1

PO

1S

TAT

SR

V

1~8

PO

1

PO

1S

TAT

SR

V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SL61PO1

SL62PO1

Figure 3-40 PH1 front panel

PH

1

PH

1ST

ATSR

V

1~8 9~16

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-88 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 127: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-41 PD1 front panel

PD1

PD1

STA

TSR

V

1-16 17-32

Indicators

Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Interfaces

Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1–8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces DB44 E1 cable to theexternal equipmentor E1 cable to the E1Panel

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-89

Page 128: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces RJ-45 The cables need to bemade on site byterminating networkcables with RJ-45connectors

Table 3-80 PH1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1–8 1 to 8 E1 interfaces DB44 E1 cable to theexternal equipmentor E1 cable to the E1Panel

9–16 9 to 16 E1 interfaces DB44

Table 3-81 PD1 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

1–16 1 to 16 E1 interfaces MDR68 E1 transit cable

17–32 17 to 32 E1 interfaces MDR68

For the pin assignments of the DB44 interface of the SL61PO1/PH1 board, see Figure 3-42 andrefer toTable 3-82. For the pin assignment of the RJ-45 interface of the SL62PO1 board, seeFigure 3-43, and refer to Table 3-83. For the pin assignments of the MDR68 interface of thePD1 board, see Figure 3-44 and refer to Table 3-85.

Figure 3-42 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)

Pos. 1

Pos. 44

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-90 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 129: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

15 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 38 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+)

30 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 23 1st E1 receiving differential signal (–)

14 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 37 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

29 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 22 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (–)

13 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 36 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

28 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 21 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (–)

12 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 35 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 20 4th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

11 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 34 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

26 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 19 5th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

10 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 33 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

25 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 18 6th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

9 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 32 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

24 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 17 7th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

8 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 31 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

7 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 16 8th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

Others Reserved - -

Figure 3-43 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

Interface Pin Signal

n (n: 1–8) 1 The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (+)

2 The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (–)

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-91

Page 130: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interface Pin Signal

4 The nth E1 receiving differential signal (+)

5 The nth E1 receiving differential signal (–)

3, 6, 7, 8 Reserved

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-84.

Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

Indicator Status Meaning

Yellow indicator On The E1 signal is lost.

Off The E1 signal is normal.

Green indicator - Reserved.

Figure 3-44 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)

Pos. 1

Pos. 68

Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

36 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 38 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+)

35 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 37 1st E1 receiving differential signal (–)

42 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 40 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

41 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 39 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (–)

46 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 44 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+)

45 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 43 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (–)

50 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 48 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

49 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 47 4th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-92 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 131: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

3 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

4 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 2 5th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

7 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

8 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 6 6th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

11 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 9 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

12 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 10 7th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

15 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 13 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

16 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 14 8th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

22 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 20 9th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

21 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 19 9th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

26 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 24 10th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

25 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 23 10th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

30 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 28 11th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

29 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 27 11th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

34 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 32 12th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

33 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 31 12th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

55 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 53 13th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

56 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 54 13th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

59 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 57 14th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

60 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 58 14th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

63 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 61 15th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

64 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 62 15th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

67 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 65 16th E1 receiving differential signal (+)

68 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (–) 66 16th E1 receiving differential signal (–)

Others Reserved - -

3.11.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 610, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 3 and 4. In the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-93

Page 132: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-45 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PO1/PH1 PO1/PH1

Figure 3-46 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

PO1/PH1 PO1/PH1

PO1/PH1 PO1/PH1

PO1/PH1

Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Item Description

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 610

Slot 3 > slot 4

Slot assignment priority in the caseof the IDU 620

slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.11.6 Board Feature CodeThe interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of thebar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code.

Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1

Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (ohm)

A 75

B 120

3.11.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J2 byte.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-94 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 133: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

J2 Byte

The board supports two modes, which are as follows:

l Single-byte mode

l 16-byte mode with CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received isset to the disabled mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte isautomatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". Thelatter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.11.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including E1 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

E1 Interface Performance

The performance of the E1 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-88 E1 interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Code pattern HDB3

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1

Item Description

PO1 PH1 PD1

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 280 g 310 g 380 g

Powerconsumption

< 2 W < 2.8 W < 5.8 W

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-95

Page 134: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.12 EFT4The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.

Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B

Function SL61EFT4VER.A SL61EFT4VER.B

LPT Not supported Supported

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals.

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working

modes supported are 100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length thatranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes.

l Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.

l Supports the IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet port.

l Supports the point-to-point link state pass through (LPT) function (only theSL61EFT4VER.B provides this function).

NOTE

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports and LPT, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio TransmissionSystem Feature Description.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the following encapsulation formats: high level data link control (HDLC), link

access procedure-SDH (LAPS), and generic framing procedure (GFP).

l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s.

l Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1–63) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1–6). The maximum bandwidth of a VCTRUNK is 100 Mbit/s.

l Supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS).

NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-96 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 135: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Overhead Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

l Supports events and alarms.

NOTE

l For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path.

l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services arenot affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board isinitialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services canbe interrupted.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EFT4.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-97

Page 136: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-47 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule

Encap-sulationmodule

SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE

FE

Service bus Control bus FE

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit

Control andcommunication

module

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Interface processingmodule

Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE signal.

2 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for theEthernet frames.

4 Mapping module Performs mapping at the VC-12/VC-3 level for the dataframes after encapsulation.

5 Logic processingunit

Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-98 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 137: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping module Demaps the signal at the VC-12/VC-3 level.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Decapsulates the signal after the demapping.

4 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.

5 Interface processingmodule

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sendsthe generated FE signal to the Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.12.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-48 EFT4 front panel

EFT

4

EFT

4

FE2 FE3

STAT

SRV

FE1 FE4

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-99

Page 138: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicators

Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Interfaces

Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

FE1–FE4 Fast Ethernet serviceinterface

RJ-45 Network cable

For the front view and pin assignments of FE1–FE4 interfaces, see Figure 3-49 and refer toTable 3-95.

Figure 3-49 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-100 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 139: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1–FE4 interfaces

Interface Pin Signal

FE1–FE4 1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (–)

3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (–)

4, 5, 7, 8 Reserved

FE1–FE4 interfaces each have two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-96.

Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

ACT (yellow) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe IDU 610 can be configured with only one EFT4, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots 3and 4. The IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed inslots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Figure 3-50 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFT4 EFT4

Figure 3-51 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EFT4 EFT4

EFT4 EFT4

EFT4

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-101

Page 140: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 610

Slot 3 > slot 4

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.12.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDHparameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH Parameters

The J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.

l J1 byteThe board supports four modes, which are as follows:– Single-byte mode

– 16-byte mode with CRC

– 16-byte mode without CRC

– 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be receivedis set to the disable mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The firstbyte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWeiSBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

l J2 byteThe board supports two modes, which are as follows:– Single-byte mode

– 16-byte mode with CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be receivedis set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The firstbyte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWeiSBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

Ethernet External Port Parameters

The EFT4 provides four external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT4. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows: port enabled, working mode, maximumframe length, and flow control.

l Port enabled

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-102 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 141: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working modeThe board supports three working modes as follows:– Auto-negotiation

– 10M full-duplex

– 100M full-duplex

By default, the working mode is auto-negotiation. When the equipment on the oppositeside adopts the auto-negotiation, 10M full-duplex, or 100M full-duplex mode, the localequipment should be set to the same working mode. When the equipment on the oppositeside adopts 10M half-duplex or 100M half-duplex, the local equipment should be set to theauto-negotiation mode.

l Maximum frame lengthThe board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smallerthan the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

l Flow controlThe board supports three flow control modes as follows:– Disabled mode

– Autonegotiation flow control mode

– Non-autonegotiation flow control mode

By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode.The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Enable dissymmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow controlThe port adopts the symmetric flow control mode or dissymmetric flow control modeaccording to the auto-negotiation result.

The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Send only

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Receive onlyThe port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-103

Page 142: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

The flow control parameter should be set depending on that of the equipment on the oppositeside.

Ethernet Internal Port ParametersThe EFT4 provides four internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK4, corresponding toPORT1 to PORT4 respectively. The parameters that you may frequently set for every internalport are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, bound path, and LCAS.

l Encapsulation/Mapping protocolThe board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFPis the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same asthe protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

l Bound pathAll the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximumnumber of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK.The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

l LCASThe board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.12.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

10/100BASE-T(X) Interface PerformanceThe 10/100BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following table providesthe primary performance.

Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ-45

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-104 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 143: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 306 g

Power consumption 7.5 W

3.13 EMS6The EMS6 is a 4 Port RJ45 + 2 Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching ProcessingBoard.

3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B.

Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B

Function SL61EMS6VER.A SL61EMS6VER.B

LPT Not supported Supported

3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmissionservices and Layer 2 switching services.

Ethernet Service Signal Processingl Provides GE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces by using two SFP modules. The

GE electrical interface is compatible with the FE electrical interface.l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working

modes supported are as follows:– The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-

duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working

modes.l Supports the setting and querying of the network attributes of the Ethernet ports. The

following three network attributes are available: UNI, C-aware, and S-aware.l Supports the setting and querying of the TAG attributes of the Ethernet ports. The following

three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. The TAG attribute of an

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-105

Page 144: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Ethernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is setto UNI.

l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length thatranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes.

l Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.External ports PORT1–PORT6 and internal ports VCTRUNK5–VCTRUNK8 supportJUMBO frames. Internal ports VCTRUNK1–VCTRUNK4 do not support JUMBO frames.

l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x (only fortransparently transmitted Ethernet services).

l Supports the point-to-point LPT function and the point-to-multipoint LPT function (onlythe SL61EMS6VER.B provides this function).

l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.

NOTE

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports, LPT, and LAG, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Servicesl Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT.

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN.

l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

l Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapidspanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w.

l Supports the IGMP snooping.

NOTE

For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

QinQ Service Processingl Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad.

l Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag.

l Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).

NOTE

For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Ethernet Service QoS Processingl Supports the following traffic classifications:

– Port-based traffic classification

– Port+CVLAN-based traffic classification

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-106 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 145: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

– Port+SVLAN-based traffic classification

– Port+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification

l Supports traffic-based CAR.

l Supports traffic-based CoS.

l Supports queue-based traffic shaping.

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet QoS, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Ethernet OAM Processingl Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:

– Management of OAM maintenance points

– Continuity check test

– Loopback test

– Link trace test

– Ping test

– Performance test

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:– OAM automatic discovery

– Link performance monitoring

– Fault detection

– Remote loopback initiating

– Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking

NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signalsl Supports the following encapsulation formats: HDLC, LAPS, and GFP.

l Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s.

l Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1–63) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1–6). The maximum bandwidth of a VCTRUNK is 100 Mbit/s.

l Supports the LCAS.

NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processingl Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level.

l Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

l Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-107

Page 146: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Alarms and Performance Eventsl Provides rich alarms and performance events.

l Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.

l Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performancethreshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.

l Supports events and alarms.

NOTE

l For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to theOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Maintenance Guide.

l For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System FeatureDescription.

Maintenance Featuresl Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports.

l Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path.

l Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames.

l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the detecting of the board temperature.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the SFP module.

NOTE

l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620Maintenance Guide.

l When a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset, but the services are not affected. When a coldreset is performed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold resetis performed, services can be interrupted.

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the workingprinciple of the EMS6.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-108 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 147: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-52 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle

Backplane

PXCInterfacemodule

Encap-sulationmodule

SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Mappingmodule

FE/GE

FE/GE

Service bus Control bus FE/GE

PXC

Logicprocessing

unit

Control andcommunication

moduleMail box

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Interface processingmodule

Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallelconversion for the accessed FE/GE signal.

2 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRCcode processing, and Ethernet performance counting forthe frame signal.Classifies the traffic according to the service format andconfiguration requirements (for example, Ethernetpacket, VLAN packet, and other packet format).Processes tags according to the service type.Forwards data frames according to the service type.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for theEthernet frames.

4 Mapping module Performs mapping at the VC-12, VC-3, or at acorresponding virtual concatenation level for the dataframes after encapsulation.

5 Logic processingunit

Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalto the PXC.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-109

Page 148: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6

Procedure

FunctionalModule

Processing Flow

1 Logic processingunit

Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signalfrom the active PXC.

2 Mapping module Demaps the signal at the VC-12, VC-3, or at acorresponding virtual concatenation level.

3 Encapsulationmodule

Decapsulates the signal after the demapping.

4 Service processingmodule

Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC codecomputing, and Ethernet performance counting.Forwards data frames according to the service type.Processes tags according to the service type.

5 Interface processingmodule

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for theEthernet frame signal, and sends the generated FE/GEsignal to the Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing FlowThe communication and control module of the EMS6 consists of the CPU and its peripheralcircuits. The EMS6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration dataand querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EMS6 through thecommunication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside theEMS6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through thecommunication and control module.

3.13.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-53 EMS6 front panel

EM

S6

EM

S6

FE2FE1 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2

STAT

PRO

GSR

VLI

NK1

ACTI

V1LI

NK2

ACTI

V2

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-110 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 149: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicators

Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

PROG 100 ms on (green), and 100ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

300 ms on (green), and 300ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.

100 ms on (red), and 100 msoff

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is beingpowered or being reset, thememory self-check fails orloading upper layer softwarefails.When the board is running,the logic files or upper layersoftware is lost.

Off The software is runningnormally.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-111

Page 150: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK1) On The link at the GE1 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE1 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing The GE1 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE1 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

Green indicator (LINK2) On The link at the GE2 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE2 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV2) On or flashing The GE2 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE2 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

Interfaces

Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description

Interface

Description Type of Connector Cable

FE1–FE4

Fast Ethernetservice interface

RJ-45 Network cable.

GE1–GE2

Gigabit Ethernetservice interface

Replaceable SFP modulel Optical module: Uses the

LC connector, andsupports 1000BASE-SXand 1000BASE-LX.

l Electrical module: Usesthe RJ-45 connector andsupports10/100/1000BASE-T(X).

l When the optical moduleis used, use the fiberjumper.

l When the electricalmodule is used, use thenetwork cable.

The FE port and GE electrical port of the EMS6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensingmode. For the front view and pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-54 and referto Table 3-105 and Table 3-106.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-112 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 151: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-54 RJ-45 front view

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(–)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(–)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(–)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(–)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-113

Page 152: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(–)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(–)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(–)

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table3-107.

Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing The port is transmitting orreceiving data.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

LabelThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EMS6.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface of the EMS6 islower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.13.5 Valid SlotsThe EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-114 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 153: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-55 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

EMS6 EMS6

EMS6 EMS6

EMS6

Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.13.6 Board Feature CodeThe type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature codethat is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.

Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6

Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module

01 1000BASE-SX (0.55 km) 34060286

02 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 34060219

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052

3.13.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDHparameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH Parameters

The J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.

l J1 byte

The board supports the following four modes: single-byte mode, 16-byte mode with CRC,16-byte mode without CRC, and 64-byte mode. By default, the board does not monitor thereceived J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J1 byteto be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-115

Page 154: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after thecharacter string).

l J2 byteThe board supports the following two modes: single-byte mode and 16-byte mode withCRC. By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to bereceived is set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC.The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code"HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after the character string).

Ethernet External Port Parameters

The EMS6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you mayfrequently set for every external port are as follows:

l Basic attributes

l TAG attributes

l Network attributes

l Flow control

l Advanced attributes

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following threeparameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.

l Port enabledThis parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default,this parameter is set to disabled.

l Working mode– The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-

duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes.– The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working

modes.Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working modeof the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l Maximum frame lengthThe board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. Bydefault, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smallerthan the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on theopposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. TheTAG attributes include the following parameters:

l TAGThe TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be setto TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware.The principles for processing packets are as follows:

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-116 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 155: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discardsthe packets that do not contain a TAG.

– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discardsthe packets that contain a TAG.

– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that donot contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port addsa TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packetsthat contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

l Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parametercan be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If thisparameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparentlytransmits the received packet.

l Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for theport. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed.The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, thenetwork attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

l UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNIport has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.

l C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.

l S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

The board supports the following flow control modes:autonegotiation flow control mode andnon-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabledmode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of theequipment on the opposite side.

l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode.– Enable dissymmetric flow control

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow controlThe port adopts the symmetric flow control mode or dissymmetric flow control modeaccording to the auto-negotiation result.

l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:– Disabled

The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-117

Page 156: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

– Send onlyThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the receivedPAUSE frames.

– Receive onlyThe port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE framesduring congestion.

– Enable symmetric flow controlThe port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the receivedPAUSE frames.

The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcastpacket suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services andalso effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for thebroadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and BroadcastPacket Suppression Threshold.l The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the portdoes not use the broadcast packet suppression function.

– When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the portdiscards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcastpackets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold.

l The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the rangefrom 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcastpackets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceedsNx10%.

Ethernet Internal Port ParametersThe EMS6 provides eight internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK8. The parametersthat you may frequently set for every internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mappingprotocol, bound path, and LCAS.

l The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed.The TAG attributes include the following parameters:– TAG

The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can beset to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAGaware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:– Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards

the packets that do not contain a TAG.– Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and

discards the packets that contain a TAG.– Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that

do not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the portadds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of thepackets that contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

– Ingress checkThis parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. Thisparameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-118 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 157: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the porttransparently transmits the received packet.

– Default VLAN IDWhen the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID forthe port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLANID is 1.

l Encapsulation/Mapping protocolThe board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFPis the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same asthe protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

l The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services areprocessed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. Bydefault, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are asfollows:– UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI

port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes.– C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.

The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag.– S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets.

The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.l Bound path

All the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximumnumber of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK.The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

l LCASThe board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCASfunction is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS functionshould be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on theopposite side.

3.13.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE portperformance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

GE Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the GE optical interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 1000

Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Fiber type Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-119

Page 158: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Item Performance

Transmission distance (km) 0.55 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) –9.5 to 0 –9 to –3

Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) –17 –19

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 –3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9

NOTE

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can usedifferent types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes andtransmission distances.

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) Interface PerformanceThe 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following tableprovides the primary performance.

Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ-45

NOTE

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules to provide 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interfaces.

10/100BASE-T(X) Interface PerformanceThe 10/100BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following table providesthe primary performance.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-120 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 159: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ-45

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)

Weight 400 g

Power consumption < 12.3 W

3.14 PXCThe PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board.

3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PXC is SL61.

3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies powerto other boards.

Power Processingl Receives one input of -48 V/-60 V power.

l Outputs one -48 V and one +3.3 V power for other boards.

l Supplies power to the components of the board.

l Detects and protects the input power.

Clock Processingl Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and frame headers of service signals

and overhead signals for other boards.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-121

Page 160: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be thesystem clock source. The service clock source can be line, tributary, or microwave clocksource.

l Supports clock protection based on clock priority, SSM protocol, or extended SSMprotocol.

l Supports the detection of the external clock source.

l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.

l One PXC supports one input and one output of the external clock.

l The external clock interface can be used as the wayside service interface.

l The external clock interface can transparently transmit DCC bytes, synchronous dataoverhead bytes, asynchronous data overhead bytes, and orderwire overhead bytes.

Cross-Connection Processingl Grooms inter-board service signals.

l Provides full timeslot cross-connection of VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 equivalent to 16x16 VC-4.

l Provides cross-connection of 16x16 pointer indication signals.

l Supports service signal broadcasting.

l Supports the AU_AIS alarm being transparently transmitted by the service path that VC-4scan pass through.

Protection Processingl Supports 1+1 standby for the input power and 1+1 standby for the internal power module

(IDU 620).l Supports 1+1 hot standby of its clock unit and cross-connect unit (IDU 620).

l Supports the SNCP switching (IDU 610 and IDU 620).

l Supports the linear MSP (IDU 610 and IDU 620).

l Supports the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring on STM-4 optical transmission links (IDU620).

l Supports the HSB switching (IDU 620).

Maintenance Featuresl Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the board temperature.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTEWhen a warm reset is performed, the software modules of the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected.When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized(if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can beinterrupted.

3.14.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the PXC.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-122 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 161: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-56 Block diagram of the PXC

Backplane

Other boardsCross-connect

unit

SCC

SCC

Service busOverhead bus Control bus

Clock signal

Clockunit

Externalclockunit

Powerunit

Logiccontrol

unit

External clock signal

Service boards

Other boards-48V -48V

+3.3V

External Clock Unit

In the receive direction, the external clock unit accesses one 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s signal. If thesignal accessed is a wayside service signal, it is multiplexed into a 2M timeslot of an 8M overheadsignal and then sent to the SCC. If the signal accessed is a clock signal, it is sent to the clockunit.

In the transmit direction, to output the external clock, the unit receives an external clock signalfrom the clock unit. To output the wayside service signal, the unit demultiplexes the waysideservice signal from the 8M overhead signal.

Clock Unit

The clock unit detects and selects the external clock source or the service clock source fromservice boards. Through the phase-locked loop, the unit outputs the system clock and frameheaders of service signals and overhead signals for other units on the PXC and also other boards.

Cross-Connect Unit

The cross-connect unit is a three-level cross-connect matrix. The first level and the third levelare space division cross-connect matrixes that support VC-4 cross-connection only, with a cross-connect capacity of 16x16 VC-4s. The first level is called forward cross-connection and the thirdlevel is called backward cross-connection. The second level is a time division matrix thatsupports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connection, with the cross-connect capacity equivalent to16x16 VC-4s. It is called lower order cross-connection.

The lower order cross-connect matrix is the core of a cross-connect unit. The forward andbackward cross-connect matrixes are used to improve the speed at which the cross-connect unitimplements service protection switching.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-123

Page 162: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-57 Cross-connect unit architecture

1#VC-4

16#VC-4

...

Forwardcross-connectmatrix

...

Lower ordercross-connectmatrix

Backward cross-connectmatrix

... ...

1#VC-4

16#VC-4

16x16 VC-4Equivalent

to16x16 VC-4

16x16 VC-4

Power UnitThe power unit processes the input -48 V/-60 V power as follows:

1. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from very high input current.2. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from reverse polar connection of the input

power.3. Performs EMI filtering for the input current and detects whether the input current is very

high or very low.4. Distributes one power input to the -48 V power bus in the backplane, to supply -48 V power

to the SCC and IF boards.5. Uses a DC/AC power module to convert the other power input into +3.3 V power and then

sends it to the +3.3 V power bus in the backplane, to supply +3.3 V power to the otherboards.

The power unit also supplies power to the chips on the PXC.

Logic Control UnitThe board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data andquerying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The commandresponse reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events arereported to the CPU also through the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGAsoftware.

3.14.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label onthe front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-58 PXC front panel

PXC

PXC

STA

T

AC

T

PW

RS

YN

C

-48V--60V SYS-PWR

CLKO CLKINEG(-) RTN(+) PULL

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-124 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 163: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicators

Table 3-114 PXC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PWR On (green) The power supply is workingnormally.

On (red) The +3.3 V power supply isfaulty, or the input -48 Vpower supply is abnormal.

Off There is no power access.

SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost, orswitching occurs to the clocksource.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Interfaces

Table 3-115 PXC interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

CLKI External clock/wayside serviceinput port

SMB External clockcable/waysideservice cable

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-125

Page 164: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

CLIO External clock/wayside serviceoutput port

RTN(+) Power input (+) Type-D Power cable

NEG(-) Power output (–)

SYS-PWRa Input power switch - -

NOTE

a: The SYS-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label and an operation guidance label on the front panel.

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were deliveredpreviously.

3.14.5 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 610, the PXC can be installed in slot 1. In the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed inslots 1 and 3.

Figure 3-59 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

Figure 3-60 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-126 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 165: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-116 Slot assigning principle of the PXC

Item Description

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 610

Slot 1

Slot assigning priority in the case ofthe IDU 620

Slot 1 > slot 3

NOTEWhen the system is powered on and the two PXCs are already seated, the PXC in slot 1 is the active boardand the one in slot 3 is the standby. If one PXC is inserted when another is already in the working state,the existing board becomes the active board and the newly inserted board becomes the standby board.

3.14.6 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters.

Clock Source and Clock Source PrioritySupports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the systemclock source. The service clock source can be a line, tributary, or microwave clock source. Selectthe required clock source and then set the clock source priority.

By default, the PXC employs the internal clock source, that is, the clock working in the free-runmode.

Clock ProtectionFor the PXC, clocks are protected based on the clock source priority, SSM, or extended SSMprotocols. Determine the clock protection scheme as required.

By default, the PXC protects clocks according to the clock source priority.

Input External Clock Parameter SettingTo input an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock. If the SSMor extended SSM protocols are enabled, also set the S1 byte of the external clock.

Output External Clock Parameter SettingTo output an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock and also theclock source traced by the 2M phase-locked loop.

3.14.7 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronizationperformance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and powerconsumption.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-127

Page 166: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Table 3-117 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronization source 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703§9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out ranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response and holdoverperformance

Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-118 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of themicrowave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 75

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-119 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight)

Weight 540 g

Power consumption < 7.5 W

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-128 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 167: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.15 SCCThe SCC is a system control and communication board.

3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C andSL61SCCVER.E.

Table 3-120 Difference between the functional versions

Item SL61SCCVER.B SL61SCCVER.C SL61SCCVER.E

Synchronous datainterface

Does not provide theinterface.

1 1

Orderwire spanningfunction

Does not support thefunction.

Supports thefunction.

Supports thefunction.

Power module Provides the module. Does not provide themodule.

Provides the module.

3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also variousmanagement and auxiliary interfaces.

System Control and Communicationsl Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and

ODUs by using the NE software.l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the SCC.

The board software of all the other boards except the EMS6 is integrated on the SCC.l Collects performance events and alarms.

l Communicates with the NM system and processes at most 12-channel DCC.

l Cross-connects overheads.

Management and Auxiliary Interfacesl Provides one NM interface and one NE cascade interface.

l Provides one management serial port.

l Provides one 6-input and 2-output alarm interface.

l Provides one asynchronous data interface.

l Provides one 64 kbit/s G.703-compliant synchronous data interface (only the SL61SCC ofVER.C or VER.E provides this function).

l Provides one orderwire interface.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-129

Page 168: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Supports the setting of the synchronous data interface as a transparent transmissioninterface for orderwire bytes to realize the orderwire spanning function (only the SL61SCCof VER.C or VER.E provides this function).

Protection Processingl Processes the protection switching of 1+1 protection configuration.

l Processes clock protection switching.

l Processes linear MSP switching.

l Processes the protection switching of a two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring.

l Processes SNCP switching.

l Provides +3.3 V power standby protection (Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.Eprovides this function).

Maintenance Featuresl Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board.

l Supports the querying of the board temperature.

l Supports the detecting of all the indicators of the boards.

l Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.

l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

3.15.3 Working PrincipleThis section describes the working principle of the SCC .

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-61 Block diagram of the SCC

Backplane

Overhead bus Control bus

Overheadcross-

connectunit

Auxiliaryinterface

unit

Control andcommunication

unit

ODU control signal

-48V

+3.3V

Other boards

PXCPowerunit Other boards

Other boards

Orderwire interface

Asynchronous data interface

External alarm input/output interface

NM interface

NE cascade interface

Debugging serial portIF1A/IF1B

Synchronous data interface

NOTE

l The SL61SCC of VER.B does not have the synchronous data interface.

l The SL61SCC of VER.C does not have the power unit.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-130 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 169: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E processes the input and outputof the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and externalalarm interface. The input/output information of the external alarm interface is processed by thecontrol and communication unit. The data of the orderwire interface, asynchronous datainterface, and synchronous data interface is interworked with the overhead cross-connect unitthrough the overhead bus.

The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.B processes the input and output of theorderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, and external alarm interface. The input/outputinformation of the external alarm interface is processed by the control and communication unit.The data of the orderwire interface and asynchronous data interface is interworked with theoverhead cross-connect unit through the overhead bus.

Overhead Cross-Connect Unit

The overhead cross-connect unit cross-connects the overheads from the auxiliary unit, controland communication unit, and other boards, and thus the following functions are realized.

l The DCC processed by the control and communication unit is added/dropped to/from theline.

l The orderwire and asynchronous data is added/dropped to/from the line.

l The orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between lines can be interworked.

Control and Communication Unit

The control and communication unit is composed of a CPU and its peripheral circuit. This unitperforms the following functions:

l Controls and manages the IDU and other boards, and also collects alarms and performanceevents through the control bus.

l Controls and manages the ODU by the ODU control signal transmitted between the serialport and the SMODEM in the IF board.

l Communicates with the NM system by processing DCC bytes and the NM data that aretransmitted from the NM interface.

l Performs configuration management, performance management, and alarm managementaccording to NM commands.

l Performs protection management.

Power Unit

Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.E provides the power unit.

The power unit performs the following functions:

l Converts the input -48 V power into +3.3 V power.

l Realizes the backup function of the internal power modules.

l Supplies power to the chips on the SCC.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-131

Page 170: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.15.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator testswitch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-62 SCC front panel

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM

PHONEALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RS

T

SYSTEMSTA

T

MA

NT

PR

OG

ALM

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM

PHONEALM/S1

LAM

PTE

ST

RS

T

SYSTEMSTA

T

MA

NT

PR

OG

ALM

SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E

SCCVER.B

Indicators

Table 3-121 SCC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PROG On: 100 ms (green)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

On: 300 ms (green)Off: 300 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initiated.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-132 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 171: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

On: 100 ms (red)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) l When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the memory self-checkfails or loading upper layersoftware fails.

l When the board isrunning, the logic files orupper layer software islost.

l The pluggable storagecard is faulty.

Off The software is runningnormally.

ALM On (green) The system is workingnormally.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in thesystem.

Off The system has no poweraccess.

MANT On (yellow) The system is in themaintenance state. Themaintenance state includesloopback, laser shutdown,and ODU transmitting insilence.

Off The system is in the workingstate.

Interfaces

Table 3-122 SCC interface description

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-11 Orderwire line

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-133

Page 172: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interface Description Type of Connector Cable

COM Management port DB9 Serial port cable

ETH NM Ethernetinterface

RJ-45 Network cable

ETH-HUB NE cascade interface RJ-45 Network cable

ALM/AUX(SCCVER.C andSCCVER.E )ALM/S1(SCCVER.B)

l SCCVER.C andSCCVER.E :external alarminterface/synchronous datainterface/asynchronous datainterface

l SCCVER.B:external alarminterface/asynchronous datainterface

DB26 Auxiliary interfacecable

RST Ward reset switch - -

LAMP TEST Indicator test switcha - -

NOTE

a: Press the LAMP TEST button, and all the indicators of the IDU turn on except for the indicators on theEthernet interface. Release the button, and the indicators return to the original state.

For the pin assignments of the COM interface, see Figure 3-63 and refer to Table 3-123.

Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the COM interface

Pos.9

Pos.1

Table 3-123 Pin assignments of the COM interface

Interface Pin Signal

COM 2 Receiving data

3 Transmitting data

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-134 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 173: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interface Pin Signal

4 Data terminal ready

5 Ground

1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 Reserved

For the pin assignments of the ETH or the ETH-HUB connector, see Figure 3-64 and refer toTable 3-124.

Figure 3-64 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-124 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface

Interface Pin Signal

ETH/ETH-HUB 1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (–)

3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (–)

4, 5, 7, 8 Reserved

NOTEThe ETH/ETH-HUB interface supports MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing, which means it can also transmit datathrough pins 3 and 6, and receive data through pins 1 and 3.

The ETH/ETH-HUB interface has two indicators. For the description of the two indicators, referto Table 3-125.

Table 3-125 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is normal.

Off The link fails.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-135

Page 174: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

ACT (yellow) On or flashing The port is transmitting or receivingdata.

Off The port is not transmitting or receivingdata.

CAUTIONThe ETH and the ETH-HUB are like two ports of a hub. When the two ports are used innetworking, they cannot be connected to each other through Ethernet links. Otherwise, anEthernet loop is formed which can result in a network storm and repeated NE resetting. Figure3-65 shows two wrong connection modes.

Figure 3-65 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM PHONEALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RST

SYSTEMSTAT

MAN

T

PR

OG

ALM

LAN

SC

C

SC

C

ETH ETH-HUBCOM PHONEALM/AUX

LAM

PTE

ST

RST

SYSTEMSTAT

MAN

T

PR

OG

ALM

For the pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface, see Figure 3-66 and refer toTable 3-126.

Figure 3-66 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface

Pos.1

Pos.26

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-136 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 175: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 3-126 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface

Interface Pin Signal

ALM/AUX(ALM/S1)

1 The 1st input alarm signal

10 Ground of the 1st input alarm signal

19 The 2nd input alarm signal

2 Ground of the 2nd input alarm signal

11 The 3rd input alarm signal

20 Ground of the 3rd input alarm signal

3 The 1st output alarm signal (+)

21 The 1st output alarm signal (–)

4 The 4th input alarm signal

13 Ground of the 4th input alarm signal

22 The 5th input alarm signal

5 Ground of the 5th input alarm signal

14 The 6th input alarm signal

23 Ground of the 6th input alarm signal

6 The 2nd output alarm signal (+)

24 The 2nd output alarm signal (–)

16 The asynchronous interfacetransmitting data

8 The asynchronous interface receivingdata

25 Signal ground

7 The synchronous data interfacereceiving data (+)

9 Signal ground

12 The synchronous data interfacereceiving data (–)

15 The synchronous data interfacetransmitting data (+)

17 The synchronous data interfacetransmitting data (–)

18, 26 Reserved

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-137

Page 176: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

The SCC of VER.B does not support the synchronous data interface. Hence, pins 7, 12, 15, and 17 of theALM/AUX interface cannot be used.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label and an operation warning label on the front panel.

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protectivegloves before touching the board.

3.15.5 Jumpers and Storage CardThe SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card.

The storage card stores the following information:

l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data

l NE software and all the board software programs

l All the FPGA logics

l License file for microwave link capability

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-138 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 177: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-67 Positions of the jumpers and storage card

2

1

JUMP1JUMP2JUMP3JUMP4

2

1

JUMP4JUMP3

JUMP2JUMP1

SL61SCCVER.B

Jumper definition

10

21

9

JUMP1JUMP2JUMP3JUMP4

SL61SCCVER.C or SL61SCCVER.E

1. Jumpers 2. Storage card

Table 3-127 Setting the jumpers

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: shortcircuit)

Function

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

0 0 0 0 Normal operating state.

0 0 0 1 Reserved.

0 0 1 0 Reserved.

0 0 1 1 Commissioning state.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-139

Page 178: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: shortcircuit)

Function

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

0 1 0 0 Operating state, with the WatchDogdisabled and memory undergone fullcheck.

0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover state. Even if the NEsoftware exists, it is not running. TheIP address is always 129.9.0.5. The IPin the parameter area does not changefor the convenience of querying.

0 1 1 0 Exhibition mode.

0 1 1 1 Data recover state.

1 0 0 0 Reserved.

1 0 0 1 Reserved.

1 0 1 0 To erase the system parameter area.

1 0 1 1 To erase database.

1 1 0 0 To erase NE software and its patches.

1 1 0 1 To erase database, NE software and itspatches.

1 1 1 0 To format the file system so that all thedata is erased.

1 1 1 1 To format the file system so that all thedata is erased (file system + extendedBIOS + system parameter area).

3.15.6 Valid SlotsIn the IDU 610 and the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2.

Figure 3-68 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 610

EXT Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-140 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 179: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-69 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

NOTEAn SCC integrates an EOW subboard which occupies the logical slot 21.

3.15.7 NM Configuration ReferenceIn the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IPaddress, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, andasynchronous data interface parameters.

NE IDThe NE ID is a 24-bit hexadecimal number, which is used to identify the NE in ECCcommunication. The higher 8 bits of an NE ID are called the subnet ID, or the extended ID,whereas the lower 16 bits are called the basic ID. For example, for the NE ID 0x090001, "9" isthe subnet ID or extended ID and "1" is the basic ID.

By default, the NE ID is 0x09BFF0, with the subnet ID or extended ID as "9" and the basic IDas "49136".

NE IP AddressIP addresses are used and thus are valid only in TCP/IP communication.

By default, the NE IP address is 129.9.191.240.

Orderwire Interface ParametersOrderwire interface parameters include the orderwire phone number and the overhead byte usedto transmit orderwire.

The orderwire phone number is used to identify the phone in point-to-point addressing call. Thisparameter is set based on the orderwire planning. Generally, the orderwire phone number is setwith three digits.

The overhead byte used to transmit orderwire can be set to use the E1 or E2 byte, however, thissetting is invalid for SDH/PDH microwave links because the microwave system always uses amicrowave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire, regardless of whether the E1 or E2 byte isset.

Synchronous Data Interface ParametersIn the case of optical and electrical SDH lines, the synchronous data interface always uses theF1 byte. In the case of SDH/PDH microwave links, the synchronous data interface always usesa microwave self-defined byte.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-141

Page 180: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Asynchronous Interface ParametersAsynchronous interface parameters include the asynchronous data interface type and theoverhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data.

The asynchronous data interface type is RS-232.

The overhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data can be set to any byte of Serial 1 to Serial4, as shown in Figure 3-70. This setting is, however, invalid for SDH/PDH microwave linksbecause the microwave system always uses a microwave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire,regardless of which serial byte is set.

Figure 3-70 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial 1 Serial 2AU- PTRB2 B2 B2 K1 K2D4 Serial 4 D5 D6D7 D8 D9D10 D11 D12 Serial 3S1 M1 E2

3.15.8 SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance,synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, boardmechanical behavior, and power consumption.

Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-128 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-142 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 181: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTNequipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, the orderwire phones of all the OptiXRTN equipment in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwirephone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-129 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-definedbyte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 64

Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-130 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or theHuawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-131 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC

Item Description

Dimensions 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth xheight)

Weight 500g (SCCVER.B)330g (SCCVER.C)510g (SCCVER.E)

Power consumption < 7.0 W

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-143

Page 182: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

3.16 Fan Tray AssemblyThe IDU 610 adopts air convection and thus has no fan tray assembly. The IDU 620 adoptswind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.

3.16.1 CompositionThe fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proofenvironment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter.

Figure 3-71 Fan tray assembly composition

Panel

Air filter

Fan board

3.16.2 Version DescriptionThe fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN andSL61FANA.

Table 3-132 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA

Item SL61FAN SL61FANA

Number of fans 6 3

Power –48 V +3.3 V

3.16.3 Functions and FeaturesThe fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling.

The fan tray assembly also supports the following functions:

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-144 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 183: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

l Detecting faults in the fan and reports alarms.

l Querying the manufacturing information.

3.16.4 Working PrincipleThis section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principleof the fan board in the fan tray assembly.

Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-72 Block diagram of the fan board

Controland

detectionunit

SCC

Powerunit +3.3V

+3.3V+12V

Backplane

Fan unit

Power UnitThe power unit converts the input +3.3 V power into the +12 V power according to therequirement of the fan unit. The 1+1 power standby protection is also provided for the system.In addition, the power unit provides +3.3 V power for the control and detection unit.

Fan Unit

The fan unit consists of three fans that work at the same time to dissipate heat from the IDU.The fan unit integrates a detection circuit, so that the fan unit can report the fan status and alarmsto the control and detection unit.

Control and Detection Unit

Point-to-point communication is performed between the control and detection unit and the SCC.The functions of the control and detection unit are as follows:

l Reports the fan status and alarms to the SCC.

l Provides the manufacturing information for the SCC.

3.16.5 Front PanelThere is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-145

Page 184: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-73 FAN front panel

禁止接触风扇叶片!

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVE !

FAN

ATTENTIONCLEAN PERIODICALLY!

Indicators

Table 3-133 FAN indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

FAN On (green) The fan is working normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

3.16.6 Valid SlotsThe fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

3-146 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 185: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 3-74 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 3 Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-147

Page 186: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 187: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

4 Accessories

About This Chapter

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 600 IDU 610/620 include the E1 panel and the powerdistribution unit (PDU). You can select the accessories depending on the requirements.

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

Page 188: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. TheE1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.

The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panelR1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

1-8

9-16

Interfaces

Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel

Interface Description Type of Connector

T1–T16 Transmit port of the 1st to16th E1 ports (connected tothe external equipment)

BNC

R1–R16 Receive port of the 1st to 16thE1 ports (connected to theexternal equipment)

1–8 1st to 8th E1 ports (connectedto an IDU)

DB37

9–16 9th to 16th E1 ports(connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt Connecting a protectionground cable

NOTE

The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer toTable 4-2.

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 189: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

20 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

21 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

2 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

3 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

22 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

23 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

4 2nd E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

5 2nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

24 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

25 3rd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

6 3rd E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

7 3nd E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

26 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

27 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

8 4th E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

9 4th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

36 5th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

35 5th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

17 5th E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

16 5th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

34 6th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

33 6th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

15 6th E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

14 6th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

32 7th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

31 7th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

13 7th E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

12 7th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

Page 190: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

30 8th E1 receiving differentialsignal (+)

29 8th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)

11 8th E1 receiving differentialsignal (–)

10 8th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (–)

Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDUThe PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the inputpower to the equipment in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the PDU.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 PDU front panel

NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4

1 4

1 2 3 4

OUTPUT OUTPUTA B

2

20A20A 20A 20A20A20A 20A 20A

5 6

1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 191: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Interfaces

Table 4-3 PDU interface description

Position Interface Description

Output powerterminals (A)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

PGND (Groundingstud of the two-hole OTterminal)

For connecting the protection grounding cable

Input powerterminals

RTN1(+) The 1st power input (+)

RTN2(+) The 2nd power input (+)

NEG1(-) The 1st power input (-)

NEG2(-) The 2nd power input (-)

Output powerterminals (B)

+ Power output (+)

- Power output (-)

Powerswitches (A)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1–4 on the A siderespectively.

Powerswitches (B)

20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fusecapacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the rightcorrespond to output power terminals 1–4 on the B siderespectively.

4.2.2 Functions and Working PrincipleThe PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input powerto the equipment in a cabinet.

Functionsl The PDU supports two inputs of –48 V/–60 V DC power.

l Each input power supply supports four outputs.

l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.

l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.

Working PrincipleThe PDU primarily consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers(MCBs). The PDU provides the simple power distribution function for the input power.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

Page 192: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW1

SW2

SW4

SW4

INPUT

RTN1(+)

RTN2(+)

NEG1(-)

NEG2(-)

+ 1-+ 2-

+ 3-+ 4-

+ 1-+ 2-

+ 3-+ 4-

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

PGND

BGND

BGND

4.2.3 Power Distribution ModeThe IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The defaultpower distribution mode is the DC-C mode.

The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that isinside the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution ModeWhen the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuitsterminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 193: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution ModeTo use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 4 Accessories

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

Page 194: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)
Page 195: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

5 Cables

About This Chapter

This section describes the purpose, appearance, and connections of various cables of the IDU610 and the IDU 620.

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on thetop of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 600system.

5.2 Protection Ground CableThe IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables.

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together withthe IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 Vpower.

5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

5.5 Fiber JumperFiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at oneend to connect the OptiX RTN 600 optical interface boards. The connectors at the other end offiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.

5.6 E1 CableThe E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the externalequipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables tothe E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables.

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e CableExternal clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxialcables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made asrequired by the site.

5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

Page 196: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Auxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data,and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to theALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires,which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable.Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is usedto transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with oneDB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated witha connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.

5.9 External Alarm Transit CableExternal alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The otherend of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by thesite. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.

5.10 Serial Port CableSerial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 600. Thecable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCCboard, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are alsoused to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarmand asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.

5.11 Orderwire LineThe orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC boardIDU 605 and the otherend connects the interface of the orderwire phone set.

5.12 Network CableNetwork cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45connectors.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 197: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

5.1 Power CableThe power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on thetop of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 600system.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable

X3

M0201 Main label

Two cable ties

2

X2200mm

500mmL

100mmX1

AA3

A2

A1

ALabel

1. Cable connector, type-D, 3 female 2. Single cord end terminal

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-1 Power cable connections

Cable Connector Cord EndTerminal

Connections Color of Core Wire

X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to X2. Blue (-48 V power)

X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to X3. Black (powerground)

5.2 Protection Ground CableThe IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Page 198: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground CableThe protection ground cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of theexternal equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipmentshare the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable

2

Main label

H.S.TubeCable Tie1

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT2

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-2 IDU protection ground cable connections

Cable Connector Cord EndTerminal

Connections Color of Core Wire

OT OT2 - yellow-green

5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 PanelThe protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground pointof the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and otherequipment share one ground.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 199: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel

1

Main label

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-3 Power cable connections

Cable Connector Cord EndTerminal

Connections Color of Core Wire

OT OT - yellow-green

5.3 IF JumperThe IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together withthe IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 Vpower.

NOTE

No IF jumper is required if the 5D type IF cable is used. The 5D type IF cable is connected to the IF boardthrough a TNC connector.

For details about the IF cable, see ODU Hardware Description.

The IF jumper is a 2 m RG223 cable. The IF jumper uses a type-N connector at one end toconnect to the IF cable, and a TNC connector at the other end to connect to the IF board.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

Page 200: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper

1

2H.S.tube 2PcsL=3cm

2000mm

1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.4 XPIC CableThe XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.

The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPICcable is connected to the XPIC IN port of one IFX board of an XPIC working group, and theother end of the XPIC cable is connected to the XPIC OUT port of the other IFX board of thesame XPIC working group.

When the XPIC function of an IFX board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the XPICIN port and XPIC OUT port of the IFX board to loop back signals.

The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:

l XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the horizontal direction, for example, the IFXboards in slots 5 and 6 or the IFX boards in slots 7 and 8.

l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is veryshort, and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the vertical direction, for example, theIFX boards in slots 5 and 7 or the IFX boards in slots 6 and 8. The XPIC cable using straightconnectors is also used to connect the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port of the same IFXboard to loop back signals.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 201: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable

L1

1 1

L2

2 2

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male

Cable Connection TableNone.

5.5 Fiber JumperFiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at oneend to connect the OptiX RTN 600 optical interface boards. The connectors at the other end offiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.

Types of fiber jumpers

Table 5-4 Types of fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of Fiber Jumper

LC/PC FC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber

2-mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC SC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber

2-mm multi-mode fiber

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

Page 202: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of Fiber Jumper

LC/PC LC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber

2-mm multi-mode fiber

NOTEFor the OptiX RTN 600 system, the Ie-1.1 optical interface and the 1000Base-SX GE optical interface usemulti-mode fibers.

Fiber ConnectorsThe following figures show three common types of fiber connectors. They are LC/PCconnectors, SC/PC connectors, and FC/PC connectors.

Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 203: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector

5.6 E1 CableThe E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the externalequipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables tothe E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables.

The following E1 cables can be delivered together with the equipment: the E1 cables (with DB44connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the externalequipment, the E1 cables to the E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables. The E1 cables (with RJ-45connectors) to the external equipment need to be made on site by terminating network cableswith RJ-45 connectors. The description of the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the externalequipment is not provided in this topic.

5.6.1 E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the external equipmentWhen the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the externalequipment, use this E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the external equipment. Usea DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board. Make aconnector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by the site.

The E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment are categorized into 75-ohm coaxialcables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables, and one E1 cable transmits eight E1 signals. The 75-ohm coaxial cables are further categorized into 2x8 core cables and 1x16 core cables.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

Page 204: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)

L

Label 1Main label

A

Pos.1

Label 2

Label 1

Label 2

W1

W2

APos.44 1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male Label 1: W1 (E1: 1 to 4) Label 2: W2 (E1: 5 to 8)

Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)

L

Main label

A

W

APos.44 1

Pos.1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 205: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable

L

Label 1Main label

A

Pos.1

Label 2

Label 1

Label 2

W1

W2

APos.44 1

1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male Label 1: W1 (TX1 to TX8) Label 2: W2 (RX1 to RX8)

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-5 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable)

Pin Cable W1 Remarks

Pin Cable W2 Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

38 Ring 1 R1 34 Ring 1 R5

23 Tip 19 Tip

37 Ring 3 R2 33 Ring 3 R6

22 Tip 18 Tip

36 Ring 5 R3 32 Ring 5 R7

21 Tip 17 Tip

35 Ring 7 R4 31 Ring 7 R8

20 Tip 16 Tip

15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 2 T5

30 Tip 26 Tip

14 Ring 4 T2 10 Ring 4 T6

29 Tip 25 Tip

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

Page 206: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Pin Cable W1 Remarks

Pin Cable W2 Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

13 Ring 6 T3 9 Ring 6 T7

28 Tip 24 Tip

12 Ring 8 T4 8 Ring 8 T8

27 Tip 7 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 5-6 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)

Pin Cable W Remarks

Pin Cable W Remarks

Core SerialNumber

Core SerialNumber

38 Ring 1 R1 34 Ring 9 R5

23 Tip 19 Tip

37 Ring 3 R2 33 Ring 11 R6

22 Tip 18 Tip

36 Ring 5 R3 32 Ring 13 R7

21 Tip 17 Tip

35 Ring 7 R4 31 Ring 15 R8

20 Tip 16 Tip

15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 10 T5

30 Tip 26 Tip

14 Ring 4 T2 10 Ring 12 T6

29 Tip 25 Tip

13 Ring 6 T3 9 Ring 14 T7

28 Tip 24 Tip

12 Ring 8 T4 8 Ring 16 T8

27 Tip 7 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 207: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 5-7 120-ohm E1 cable connections

Pin Cable W1 Remarks

Pin Cable W2 Remarks

Color Relation

Color Relation

15 Blue Pair T1 38 Blue Pair R1

30 White 23 White

14 Orange Pair T2 37 Orange Pair R2

29 White 22 White

13 Green Pair T3 36 Green Pair R3

28 White 21 White

12 Brown Pair T4 35 Brown Pair R4

27 White 20 White

11 Grey Pair T5 34 Grey Pair R5

26 White 19 White

10 Blue Pair T6 33 Blue Pair R6

25 Red 18 Red

9 Orange Pair T7 32 Orange Pair R7

24 Red 17 Red

8 Green Pair T8 31 Green Pair R8

7 Red 16 Red

Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.6.2 E1 cables to the E1 panelWhen an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board or near the E1 transit cable, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is nearthe E1 panel.

Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

Page 208: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-12 Diagram of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel

1500 mm

A

APos.1

Pos.44

X1B

Pos.1

Pos.37

B

X2

X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-8 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel

ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks

X1.38 X2.20 R1 X1.34 X2.36 R5

X1.23 X2.2 X1.19 X2.17

X1.37 X2.22 R2 X1.33 X2.34 R6

X1.22 X2.4 X1.18 X2.15

X1.36 X2.24 R3 X1.32 X2.32 R7

X1.21 X2.6 X1.17 X2.13

X1.35 X2.26 R4 X1.31 X2.30 R8

X1.20 X2.8 X1.16 X2.11

X1.15 X2.21 T1 X1.11 X2.35 T5

X1.30 X2.3 X1.26 X2.16

X1.14 X2.23 T2 X1.10 X2.33 T6

X1.29 X2.5 X1.25 X2.14

X1.13 X2.25 T3 X1.9 X2.31 T7

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 209: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks ConnectorX1

ConnectorX2

Remarks

X1.28 X2.7 X1.24 X2.12

X1.12 X2.27 T4 X1.8 X2.29 T8

X1.27 X2.9 X1.7 X2.10

Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.6.3 E1 Transit CableAn E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses a MDR68connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the other end toconnect an E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment or an E1 panel.

An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 port or a 120-ohm E1 port.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 transit cable

Pos.1

Pos.68

Pos.44

Pos.1

Label2

Label1

A

B

X3

X2

X1

Main Label

400 mm

W1

W2

1. Cable connector, type-MDR, 68 male 2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 femaleLabel 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-9 MDR68-DB44 E1 transit cable connections

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

W1 X1.35 X2.38 R1 X1.2 X2.34 R5

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

Page 210: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

X1.36 X2.23 X1.1 X2.19

X1.37 X2.15 T1 X1.4 X2.11 T5

X1.38 X2.30 X1.3 X2.26

X1.39 X2.37 R2 X1.6 X2.33 R6

X1.40 X2.22 X1.5 X2.18

X1.41 X2.14 T2 X1.8 X2.10 T6

X1.42 X2.29 X1.7 X2.25

X1.43 X2.36 R3 X1.10 X2.32 R7

X1.44 X2.21 X1.9 X2.17

X1.45 X2.13 T3 X1.12 X2.9 T7

X1.46 X2.28 X1.11 X2.24

X1.47 X2.35 R4 X1.14 X2.31 R8

X1.48 X2.20 X1.13 X2.16

X1.49 X2.12 T4 X1.16 X2.8 T8

X1.50 X2.27 X1.15 X2.7

W2 X1.19 X3.38 R9 X1.54 X3.34 R13

X1.20 X3.23 X1.53 X3.19

X1.21 X3.15 T9 X1.56 X3.11 T13

X1.22 X3.30 X1.55 X3.26

X1.23 X3.37 R10 X1.58 X3.33 R14

X1.24 X3.22 X1.57 X3.18

X1.25 X3.14 T10 X1.60 X3.10 T14

X1.26 X3.29 X1.59 X3.25

X1.27 X3.36 R11 X1.62 X3.32 R15

X1.28 X3.21 X1.61 X3.17

X1.29 X3.13 T11 X1.64 X3.9 T15

X1.30 X3.28 X1.63 X3.24

X1.31 X3.35 R12 X1.66 X3.31 R16

X1.32 X3.20 X1.65 X3.16

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 211: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

X1.33 X3.12 T12 X1.68 X3.8 T16

X1.34 X3.27 X1.67 X3.7

W1/W2 Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1eCable

External clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxialcables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made asrequired by the site.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable

L

Main Label1

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMB, female

Cable Connection Table

None.

5.8 Auxiliary Interface CableAuxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data,and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to theALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires,which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable.Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is usedto transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with oneDB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated witha connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

Page 212: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable

A

B

500mm300mm

Main label

Label 1X2

Label 2 Label 3

1000mm

X3View C

C

X1

View A2

Pos.1

Pos.26

X4Pos.37

Pos.1

3

Pos.1

Pos.9

1View B

Label 5Label 6

Label 7Label 8

W1

W2

W3

W4

Label 4

1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 female 2. Cable connector, type-D, 26 male 3. Cable connector, type-D, 37female

Label 1: "OAM" Label 2: "S1" Label 3: "ALM"Label 4: "F1" Label 5: "F1-RX-TIP" Label 6: "F1-RX-RING"Label 7: "F1-TX-TIP" Label 8: "F1-TX-RING"

NOTE

In the preceding figure, "X3" indicates the asynchronous data interface, and "X2" indicates the reservedinterface.

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)

Connector X1 Connector X3 Relation Remarks

X1.8 X3.2 - R

X1.16 X3.3 Pair T

X1.25 X3.5 GND

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 213: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 5-11 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2)

Connector X1 Connector X4 Relation Remarks

X1.24 X4.1 Pair Out 2B 1st channel (the2nd-channeloutput alarminterface)

X1.6 X4.2 Out 2A

X1.21 X4.3 Pair Out 1B 2nd channel (the1st-channeloutput alarminterface)

X1.3 X4.4 Out 1A

X1.23 X4.5 Pair IN-6-GND 3rd channel (the6th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.14 X4.6 IN-6

X1.5 X4.7 Pair IN-5-GND 4th channel (the5th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.22 X4.8 IN-5

X1.13 X4.9 Pair IN-4-GND 5th channel (the4th-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.4 X4.10 IN-4

X1.20 X4.11 Pair IN-3-GND 6th channel (the3rd-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.11 X4.12 IN-3

X1.2 X4.13 Pair IN-2-GND 7th channel (the2nd-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.19 X4.14 IN-2

X1.10 X4.15 Pair IN-1-GND 8th channel (the1st-channelinput alarminterface)

X1.1 X4.16 IN-1

Table 5-12 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3)

Connector X1 Label on Cable W3 Relation Remarks

X1.7 F1-RX-TIP Pair Synchronous datainterface receiving data(+)

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

Page 214: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Connector X1 Label on Cable W3 Relation Remarks

X1.12 F1-RX-RING Synchronous datainterface receiving data(-)

X1.15 F1-TX-TIP Pair Synchronous datainterface transmittingdata (+)

X1.17 F1-TX-RING Synchronous datainterface transmittingdata (-)

5.9 External Alarm Transit CableExternal alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The otherend of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by thesite. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable

1

Pos.37

Pos.1

A

A

Main label

L

1. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

Cable Connection TableNOTE

The cable has five types of signal wires of different colors inside. There are eight blue wires, six grey wires,six pink wires, six green wires, and six orange wires. The signal cables of the same color are differentiatedby the red (RED) and black (BLK) dots on the cables. The cable with red dots is the signal cable. The cablewith black dots is defined as the ground. One "x" indicates that there is one dot at regular intervals. Forexample, a blue/redxxx cable refers to a blue signal cable on which there are three dots at regular intervals.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 215: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table 5-13 External alarm transit cable connections

ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks

1 Pink/Redx

Pair First channel (the 2nd-channel output alarminterface)

17 Green/Redxx

Pair 6thchannel

2 Pink/Blackx

18 Green/Blackxx

3 Orange/Redx

Pair Second channel (the 1st-channel output alarminterface)

19 Grey/Redxx

Pair 13thchannel

4 Orange/Blackx

20 Grey/Blackxx

5 Blue/Redx

Pair 8th channel (the 6th-channel input alarminterface)

21 Pink/Redxxx

Pair 14thchannel

6 Blue/Blackx

22 Pink/Blackxxx

7 Green/Redx

Pair 9th channel (the 5th-channel input alarminterface )

23 Orange/Redxxx

Pair 12thchannel

8 Green/Blackx

24 Orange/Blackxxx

9 Grey/Redx

Pair 3rd channel (the 4th-channel input alarminterface)

25 Blue/Redxxx

Pair 5thchannel

10 Grey/Blackx

26 Blue/Blackxxx

11 Pink/Redxx

Pair 10th channel (the 3rd-channel input alarminterface

27 Green/Redxxx

Pair 11thchannel

12 Pink/Blackxx

28 Green/Blackxxx

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

Page 216: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks ConnectorX1

Color Relation

Remarks

13 Orange/Redxx

Pair 4th channel (the 2nd-channel input alarminterface

29 Grey/Redxxx

Pair 15thchannel

14 Orange/Blackxx

30 Grey/Blackxxx

15 Blue/Redxx

Pair 7th channel (the 1st-channel input alarminterface)

31 Blue/Redxxxx

Pair 16thchannel

16 Blue/Blackxx

32 Blue/Blackxxxx

5.10 Serial Port CableSerial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 600. Thecable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCCboard, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are alsoused to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarmand asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable

Pos.9

Pos.1

1 Main lable

L

X1 X2

A

A

1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 male

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 217: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-14 Serial port cable connections

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relation

X1.3 X2.2 Pair

X1.2 X2.3

X1.5 X2.5 -

5.11 Orderwire LineThe orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC boardIDU 605 and the otherend connects the interface of the orderwire phone set.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire

1

6

1

6

1 Main Label

X1 X2

1. Orderwire wire, RJ-11 connector

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-15 Orderwire wire connections

Connector X1 Connector X2 Core

X1.3 X2.3 Tip

X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.12 Network CableNetwork cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45connectors.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

Page 218: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

RJ-45 connectors have two types of interfaces. The first type is the medium dependent interface(MDI) used by terminal equipment such as network card. Refer to Table 5-16. The second typeis the MDI-X used by network equipment. Refer to Table 5-17.

Table 5-16 Pin assignments of the MDI

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(–)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(–)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(–)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 5-17 Pin assignments of the MDI-X

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(–)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(–)

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 219: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(–)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(–)

Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables areused between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between thetwo network cables are the connections.

The ETH and ETH-HUB ports on the SCC board, the four FE ports on the EFT4 board and theGE/FE electrical ports on the EMS6 board support MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing. Thus, bothstraight through cables and crossover cables can be used between these ports and the MDI/MDI-X interfaces.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable

1

8

1

8

1Label 1 Label 2Main Label

1. Network interface connector, RJ-45

Cable Connection Table

Table 5-18 Cable connection of the straight through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description 5 Cables

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

Page 220: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-19 Cable connection of the crossover cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.6 X2.2 Orange Pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

5 CablesOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

5-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 221: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

A Indicators, Weight and PowerConsumption of Boards

Indicators of Boards

Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

Page 222: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Table A-2 IFX indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 223: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function isdisabled.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

Page 224: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingnormally.

On (red) The ODU has critical ormajor alarms, or has nopower access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received powerof the ODU is lower than thepower to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errorsexceed the threshold.

Off The microwave bit errors arein the normal range.

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports anRDI.

Off The remote system does notreport an RDI.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 225: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working normally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no power access.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.

Off The services are not configured.

LINK On (green) The air link is normal.

On (red) The air link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working normally.

On (red) The ODU has critical or major alarms, or hasno power access.

On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.

On: 300 ms (yellow)Off: 300 ms

The actually received power of the ODU islower than the power to be received.

BER On (yellow) The microwave bit errors exceed thethreshold.

Off The microwave bit errors are in the normalrange.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

Page 226: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

RMT On (yellow) The remote system reports an RDI.

Off The remote system does not report an RDI.

ACT On (green) The board is in the active state (1+1protection).The board is activated (no protection).

Off The board is in the standby state (1+1protection).The board is not activated (no protection).

Table A-5 SL4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS On (red) The optical interface of theSL4 reports the R_LOSalarm.

Off The optical interface of theSL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

A-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 227: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical interface ofthe SL1/SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical interfaceof the SD1 reports theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical interfaceof the SD1 has no R_LOSalarm.

Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-7

Page 228: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-8 PL3 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

A-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 229: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-9

Page 230: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

PROG 100 ms on (green), and 100ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

300 ms on (green), and 300ms off

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initialized.

100 ms on (red), and 100 msoff

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) When the board is beingpowered or being reset, thememory self-check fails orloading upper layer softwarefails.When the board is running,the logic files or upper layersoftware is lost.

Off The software is runningnormally.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

Off The services are notconfigured.

Green indicator (LINK1) On The link at the GE1 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE1 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing The GE1 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE1 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

A-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 231: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

Green indicator (LINK2) On The link at the GE2 port isnormal.

Off The link at the GE2 port fails.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV2) On or flashing The GE2 port is transmittingor receiving data.

Off The GE2 port is nottransmitting or receivingdata.

Table A-12 PXC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PWR On (green) The power supply is workingnormally.

On (red) The +3.3 V power supply isfaulty, or the input -48 Vpower supply is abnormal.

Off There is no power access.

SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.

On (red) The clock source is lost, orswitching occurs to the clocksource.

ACT On (green) The board is in the activestate (1+1 protection).The board is activated (noprotection).

Off The board is in the standbystate (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (noprotection).

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-11

Page 232: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Table A-13 SCC indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.

l The board has no poweraccess.

PROG On: 100 ms (green)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is loading thesoftware.

On: 300 ms (green)Off: 300 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the board is in the BIOS bootstate.

On (green) The upper layer software isbeing initiated.

On: 100 ms (red)Off: 100 ms

When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the BOOTROM self-checkfails.

On (red) l When the board is beingpowered on or being reset,the memory self-checkfails or loading upper layersoftware fails.

l When the board isrunning, the logic files orupper layer software islost.

l The pluggable storagecard is faulty.

Off The software is runningnormally.

ALM On (green) The system is workingnormally.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in thesystem.

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

A-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 233: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Indicator Status Meaning

Off The system has no poweraccess.

MANT On (yellow) The system is in themaintenance state. Themaintenance state includesloopback, laser shutdown,and ODU transmitting insilence.

Off The system is in the workingstate.

Table A-14 FAN indicator description

Indicator Status Meaning

FAN On (green) The fan is working normally.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The board is not working, isnot created, or has no poweraccess.

Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table A-15 Weight of Boards

Board Weight Power Consumption

IF1A 420 g < 12.2 W

IF1B 400 g < 12.2 W

IFX 450 g < 14.5 W

IF0A 520 g < 13.7 W

IF0B 520 g < 13.7 W

IFH2 580 g < 16.4 W

SL4 290 g < 7.2 W

SL1 290 g < 3 W

SD1 300 g < 3.9 W

SLE 300 g < 4.2 W

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-13

Page 234: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Board Weight Power Consumption

SDE 330 g < 4.9 W

PL3 310 g < 5.1 W

PO1 280 g < 2 W

PH1 310 g < 2.8 W

PD1 380 g < 5.8 W

EFT4 306 g < 7.5 W

EMS6 400 g < 12.3 W

PXC 540 g < 7.5 W

SCC 500g (SCCVER.B)330g (SCCVER.C)510g (SCCVER.E)

< 7.0 W

FAN 350 g < 9.7W

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of BoardsOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

A-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 235: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

B Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

B.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.

B.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

B.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

B.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

B.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

B.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

Page 236: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

B.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.

1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protectionSNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal ispermanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, thenormal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to thepermanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected trafficsignal to be provided.

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

802.1Q in 802.1Q 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLANtag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to aframe with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLANtags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on thepublic VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQfeature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.

B.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

A

ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization

adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to thechannel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrumutilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adoptsthe low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of thelink that carries high-priority services.

ADC See Analog to Digital Converter

add/drop multiplexer Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all or some subset ofthe constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals areadded to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passedthrough the ADM.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

adjacent channelalternate polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontalpolarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 237: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

AGC See Automatic Gain Control

AM See adaptive modulation

Analog to DigitalConverter

An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. Thereverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

APS See Automatic Protection Switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

ASK amplitude shift keying

ATPC See automatic transmit power control

AU See Administrative Unit

Automatic GainControl

A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as afunction of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.

Automatic ProtectionSwitching

Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system todetect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover thetraffic.

automatic transmitpower control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detectedat the receiver

B

Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworkswith the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It providesthe following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Powercontrol, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and managesone or more BTSs in an actual network.

BER See Bit Error Rate

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index usedto measure the communications quality of a network.

BPDU See Bridge Protocol Data Unit

Bridge Protocol DataUnit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

BSC See Base Station Controller

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-3

Page 238: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

C

C-VLAN Customer VLAN

CAR See committed access rate

CBS See Committed Burst Size

CCDP See Co-Channel Dual Polarization

Central ProcessingUnit

The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processoror central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place.

CF See compact flash

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

CIR See Committed Information Rate

CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree

Class of Service A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs,the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from highto low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the servicesof low priority.

Co-Channel DualPolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a verticalpolarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twicethe transmission capacity of the single polarization.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

Committed Burst Size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.

CommittedInformation Rate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

Common and InternalSpanning Tree

Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP andRSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridgesand regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local AreaNetwork are simply and fully connected.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

CoS See Class of Service

CPU See Central Processing Unit

CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 239: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

cross polarizationinterferencecancellation

A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminatethe cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

Cyclic RedundancyCheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D

Data CommunicationNetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

Data CommunicationsChannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1–D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4–D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

DC See Direct Current

DC-C See DC-Return Common (with Ground)

DC-I See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground)

DC-Return Common(with Ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-Return Isolate(with Ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGNDon the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DCC See Data Communications Channel

DCN See Data Communication Network

Differentiated ServicesCode Point

Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various servicestreams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHBaccording to the DSCP value.

digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of thecarrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, theinformation can be transmitted by the carrier.

Direct Current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop orchange amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internetgateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical densemode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5

Page 240: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio wavesorthogonally polarized.

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

E-LAN Ethernet-LAN

ECC See Embedded Control Channel

Electro MagneticInterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.[NTIA]

Embedded ControlChannel

An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a datacommunications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See Electro Magnetic Interference

EPL See Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN See ethernet private lan service

equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate forthe changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

ERPS See ethernet ring protection switching

ES-IS End System to Intermediate System

ethernet private lanservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedocated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.

ethernet ringprotection switching

protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.

ethernet virtual privatelan service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

ethernet virtual privateline service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EuropeanTelecommunicationsStandards Institute

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 241: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

EVPL See ethernet virtual private line service

EVPLAN See ethernet virtual private lan service

B.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F

Fast Ethernet A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies withthe IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard.

fast link pulse The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD See frequency diversity

FE See Fast Ethernet

FEC See Forward Error Correction

Field ProgrammableGate Array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arraies.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

FLP See fast link pulse

Forward ErrorCorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.

FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array

frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certainfrequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

G

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

GE See Gigabit Ethernet

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-7

Page 242: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This isto adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream routerto avoid packet discarding and congestion.

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

Gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.Itruns at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

GNE See gateway network element

Graphical UserInterface

A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphicalimages, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

GTS See Generic traffic shaping

GUI See Graphical User Interface

H

HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3

HDLC See High level Data Link Control procedure

High level Data LinkControl procedure

A data link protocol from ISO for point-to-point communications over serial links.Derived from IBM's SDLC protocol, HDLC has been the basis for numerous protocolsincluding X.25, ISDN, T1, SS7, GSM, CDPD, PPP and others. Various subsets of HDLChave been developed under the name of Link Access Procedure (LAP).

hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables andstorage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. Whenthe faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services inthe faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entiresystem.

HSM Hitless Switch Mode

hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supportsthe AM function.

I

ICMP See Internet Control Messages Protocol

IDU See indoor unit

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force

IF See intermediate frequency

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 243: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol managesand controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet GroupManagement Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RFsignal.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RFsignal.

Intermediate System toIntermediate System

A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol(IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF)algorithm to calculate the route.

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer andpublisher of International Standards.

Internet ControlMessages Protocol

ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messagesduring the transmission of IP-type data packets.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Internet ProtocolVersion 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of theInternet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications andstandardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force(IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits whilean IPv6 address has 128 bits.

IP See Internet Protocol

IPv6 See Internet Protocol Version 6

IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-9

Page 244: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

IVL Independence VLAN learning

B.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

LB See Loopback

LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

Link CapacityAdjustment Scheme

The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamicprovisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.

LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection

Local Area Network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LPT Link State Path Through

M

MA See Maintenance Association

MAC See Medium Access Control

MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer

MaintenanceAssociation

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 245: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Maintenance Domain The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for whichconnectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

Maintenance Point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

ManagementInformation Base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

Maximum TransferUnit

The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can besent over a network.

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MD See Maintenance Domain

MDI See Medium Dependent Interface

Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

Medium AccessControl

A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particularnetwork. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses.

Medium DependentInterface

The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the mediatransmission.

MEP Maintenance End Point

MIB See Management Information Base

MP See Maintenance Point

MSP See multiplex section protection

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF Mean Time Between Failure

MTTR See Mean Time To Repair

MTU See Maximum Transfer Unit

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

N

N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protectionchannel.

NE See Network Element

Network Element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors theentire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-11

Page 246: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

network managementsystem

The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, andmaintenance of a network.

Network Service AccessPoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS See network management system

NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface

non-gateway networkelement

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must betransferred by the gateway network element application layer.

non-GNE See non-gateway network element

NSAP See Network Service Access Point

O

OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance

ODU See outdoor unit

Open Shortest PathFirst

A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.

Open SystemsInterconnection

A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization ofStandards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in atelecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions thattake place at each end of a communication.

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF See Open Shortest Path First

outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequencyconversion and amplification for RF signals.

B.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P

PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should benot less than the committed information rate.

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode

PIM-SM See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 247: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

PIR See Peak Information Rate

Plesiochronous DigitalHierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed orrotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave isperpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called verticallypolarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to theplane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if thetip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

Protocol IndependentMulticast-Sparse Mode

A protocol for efficiently routing to multicast groups that may span wide-area (and inter-domain) internets. This protocol is named protocol independent because it is notdependent on any particular unicast routing protocol for topology discovery, and sparse-mode because it is suitable for groups where a very low percentage of the nodes (andtheir routers) will subscribe to the multicast session. Unlike earlier dense-mode multicastrouting protocols such as DVMRP and PIM-DM which flooded packets everywhere andthen pruned off branches where there were no receivers, PIM-SM explicitly constructsa tree from each sender to the receivers in the multicast group. Multicast packets fromthe sender then follow this tree.

Q

QoS See Quality of Service

QPSK See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

Quadrature Phase ShiftKeying

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmissionthrough the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the referencesignals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK usesfour dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On thesephases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Graycode on graph with the minimum BER.

Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoSis influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.

R

Radio Freqency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create anelectromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The ACwith frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classifiedinto such high-frequency current.

Radio NetworkController

A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-13

Page 248: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

Received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.

Received SignalStrength Indicator

The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in thereceiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDDwithin a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna

RF See Radio Freqency

RFC Request For Comment

RIP See Routing Information Protocol

RMON Remote Monitoring

RNC See Radio Network Controller

Routing InformationProtocol

Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IPprotocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source anddestination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routinginformation to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.

RS Reed-Solomon encoding

RSL Received Signal Level

RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

S

SD See space diversity

SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable

Signal Noise Ratio The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to theamplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times thelogarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

Small Form-FactorPluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SNC See SubNetwork Connection

SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 249: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

SNR See Signal Noise Ratio

SP Strict Priority

space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distanceto transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the twosignals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths throughcertain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

STM See synchronous transport module

STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1

STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface

STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface

STM-N SDH Transport Module -N

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions andclosely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on atopological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-networkplanning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view spacecan be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus onthe equipments under their management.

SubNetworkConnection

A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by theassociation of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.

SubNetworkConnection Protection

A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection ifthe working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a requiredlevel.

SVL Shared VLAN Learning

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronoustiming link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and thesynchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two performoperations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold),and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.

Synchronous DigitalHierarchy

SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It definesthe transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-15

Page 250: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

synchronous transportmodule

An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in theSDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fieldsorganized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitablyconditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronizedto the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Highercapacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacitiesfor N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

T

TCI Tag Control Information

TCP See TransmissionControl Protocol

TDM See Time Division Multiplexing

TelecommunicationManagement Network

The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-Tfor managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture formanagement, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation andadministration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.

Time DivisionMultiplexing

It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into timeslots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3……), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engrosstime slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to betransmitted over one channel.

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of thetrail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferredsignals.

TransmissionControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

TU Tributary Unit

B.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

UNI See User Network Interface

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)

Page 251: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for theinterface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a privatenetwork and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used todescribe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.

V

VC See Virtual Container

VC-12 Virtual Container -12

VC-3 Virtual Container -3

VC-4 Virtual Container -4

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internalport of a data service processing board

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connectionsin the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) informationfields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.

Virtual Local AreaNetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

Virtual PrivateNetwork

The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, andauthenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provideremote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.

VLAN See Virtual Local Area Network

Voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See Voice over IP

VPN See Virtual Private Network

W

Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection canbe used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal trafficsignal from.

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission SystemIDU 610/620 Hardware Description B Glossary

Issue 07 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-17

Page 252: IDU 610620 Hardware Description(V100R003_07)

WAN See Wide Area Network

Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NEmanagement layer of the transport network

Wide Area Network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WTR See Wait to Restore Time

X

XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination

XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation

B GlossaryOptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

IDU 610/620 Hardware Description

B-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 07 (2010-05-25)